[gtkmm] Regenerated C documentation XML and wrapped some new API.
- From: Murray Cumming <murrayc src gnome org>
- To: svn-commits-list gnome org
- Cc:
- Subject: [gtkmm] Regenerated C documentation XML and wrapped some new API.
- Date: Tue, 25 Aug 2009 10:18:57 +0000 (UTC)
commit c25e451041166a343f8de307905f21daa9d050ef
Author: Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
Date: Tue Aug 25 12:18:43 2009 +0200
Regenerated C documentation XML and wrapped some new API.
* gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml:
* gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated.
* gtk/src/printoperation.hg: Added update_custom_widget signal.
* gtk/src/statusicon.hg: Added get/set_title() and property.
ChangeLog | 9 +
gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml | 2831 +++++----
gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml |15440 ++++++++++++++++++++++++---------------------
gtk/src/printoperation.hg | 4 +
gtk/src/statusicon.hg | 5 +
5 files changed, 10002 insertions(+), 8287 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog
index 4ca0b47..9a0853b 100644
--- a/ChangeLog
+++ b/ChangeLog
@@ -1,3 +1,12 @@
+2009-08-25 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc-desktop>
+
+ Regenerated C documentation XML and wrapped some new API.
+
+ * gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml:
+ * gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated.
+ * gtk/src/printoperation.hg: Added update_custom_widget signal.
+ * gtk/src/statusicon.hg: Added get/set_title() and property.
+
2009-08-24 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc-desktop>
Fix an API break.
diff --git a/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml b/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
index dded98c..1ed28ba 100644
--- a/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
+++ b/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ or %GDK_NONE to indicate that the request was rejected.
<function name="gdk_window_constrain_size">
<description>
-Constrains a desired width and height according to a
+Constrains a desired width and height according to a
set of geometry hints (such as minimum and maximum size).
</description>
@@ -437,10 +437,10 @@ are set.
<function name="gdk_window_set_cursor">
<description>
-Sets the mouse pointer for a #GdkWindow. Use gdk_cursor_new_for_display()
-or gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap() to create the cursor. To make the cursor
-invisible, use %GDK_BLANK_CURSOR. Passing %NULL for the @cursor argument
-to gdk_window_set_cursor() means that @window will use the cursor of its
+Sets the mouse pointer for a #GdkWindow. Use gdk_cursor_new_for_display()
+or gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap() to create the cursor. To make the cursor
+invisible, use %GDK_BLANK_CURSOR. Passing %NULL for the @cursor argument
+to gdk_window_set_cursor() means that @window will use the cursor of its
parent window. Most windows should use this default.
</description>
@@ -655,13 +655,14 @@ the default root window for the default display.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_clear_area_e">
+<function name="gdk_window_get_update_area">
<description>
-Like gdk_window_clear_area(), but also generates an expose event for
-the cleared area.
-
-This function has a stupid name because it dates back to the mists
-time, pre-GDK-1.0.
+Transfers ownership of the update area from @window to the caller
+of the function. That is, after calling this function, @window will
+no longer have an invalid/dirty region; the update area is removed
+from @window and handed to you. If a window has no update area,
+gdk_window_get_update_area() returns %NULL. You are responsible for
+calling gdk_region_destroy() on the returned region if it's non-%NULL.
</description>
@@ -670,24 +671,9 @@ time, pre-GDK-1.0.
<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x coordinate of rectangle to clear
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y coordinate of rectangle to clear
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of rectangle to clear
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of rectangle to clear
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the update area for @window
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_colormap_ref">
@@ -721,6 +707,24 @@ If the result is zero, destroys the font.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_offscreen_window_get_pixmap">
+<description>
+Gets the offscreen pixmap that an offscreen window renders into.
+If you need to keep this around over window resizes, you need to
+add a reference to it.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The offscreen pixmap, or %NULL if not offscreen
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_foreign_new_for_display">
<description>
Wraps a native window in a #GdkWindow.
@@ -807,7 +811,7 @@ Return value: an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
<function name="gdk_utf8_to_string_target">
<description>
-Convert an UTF-8 string into the best possible representation
+Converts an UTF-8 string into the best possible representation
as a STRING. The representation of characters not in STRING
is not specified; it may be as pseudo-escape sequences
\x{ABCD}, or it may be in some other form of approximation.
@@ -820,9 +824,10 @@ is not specified; it may be as pseudo-escape sequences
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly allocated string, or %NULL if the
+<return> the newly-allocated string, or %NULL if the
conversion failed. (It should not fail for
-any properly formed UTF-8 string.)
+any properly formed UTF-8 string unless system
+limits like memory or file descriptors are exceeded.)
</return>
</function>
@@ -843,21 +848,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_font_get_xfont">
-<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>XFontStruct*</type> or an <type>XFontSet</type>.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an Xlib <type>XFontStruct*</type> or an <type>XFontSet</type>.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_formats">
<description>
Obtains the available information about the image formats supported
@@ -876,48 +866,36 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_set_pointer_hooks">
+<function name="gdk_colormap_query_color">
<description>
-This function allows for hooking into the operation
-of getting the current location of the pointer. This
-is only useful for such low-level tools as an
-event recorder. Applications should never have any
-reason to use this facility.
+Locates the RGB color in @colormap corresponding to the given
+hardware pixel @pixel. @pixel must be a valid pixel in the
+colormap; it's a programmer error to call this function with a
+pixel which is not in the colormap. Hardware pixels are normally
+obtained from gdk_colormap_alloc_colors(), or from a #GdkImage. (A
+#GdkImage contains image data in hardware format, a #GdkPixbuf
+contains image data in a canonical 24-bit RGB format.)
-This function is not multihead safe. For multihead operation,
-see gdk_display_set_pointer_hooks().
+This function is rarely useful; it's used for example to
+implement the eyedropper feature in #GtkColorSelection.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="new_hooks">
-<parameter_description> a table of pointers to functions for getting
-quantities related to the current pointer position,
-or %NULL to restore the default table.
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the previous pointer hook table
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_screen_get_font_options">
-<description>
-Gets any options previously set with gdk_screen_set_font_options().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="pixel">
+<parameter_description> pixel value in hardware display format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="result">
+<parameter_description> #GdkColor with red, green, blue fields initialized
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current font options, or %NULL if no default
-font options have been set.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_set_double_click_distance">
@@ -1070,16 +1048,18 @@ drives it.
<function name="gdk_test_simulate_key">
<description>
-This function is intended to be used in Gtk+ test programs.
+This function is intended to be used in GTK+ test programs.
If (@x,@y) are > (-1,-1), it will warp the mouse pointer to
the given (@x,@y) corrdinates within @window and simulate a
key press or release event.
+
When the mouse pointer is warped to the target location, use
of this function outside of test programs that run in their
own virtual windowing system (e.g. Xvfb) is not recommended.
If (@x,@y) are passed as (-1,-1), the mouse pointer will not
be warped and @window origin will be used as mouse pointer
location for the event.
+
Also, gtk_test_simulate_key() is a fairly low level function,
for most testing purposes, gtk_test_widget_send_key() is the
right function to call which will generate a key press event
@@ -1089,7 +1069,7 @@ followed by its accompanying key release event.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> Gdk window to simulate a key event for.
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow to simulate a key event for.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -1101,7 +1081,7 @@ followed by its accompanying key release event.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> A Gdk keyboard value.
+<parameter_description> A GDK keyboard value.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="modifiers">
@@ -1113,7 +1093,10 @@ followed by its accompanying key release event.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> wether all actions neccessary for a key event simulation were carried out successfully.
+<return> whether all actions neccessary for a key event simulation
+were carried out successfully.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -1236,18 +1219,25 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_font_id">
+<function name="gdk_font_equal">
<description>
-Return value: the numeric X Font ID
+Compares two fonts for equality. Single fonts compare equal
+if they have the same X font ID. This operation does
+not currently work correctly for fontsets.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font">
+<parameter name="fonta">
<parameter_description> a #GdkFont.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="fontb">
+<parameter_description> another #GdkFont.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the numeric X Font ID
+<return> %TRUE if the fonts are equal.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1346,6 +1336,24 @@ other window managers.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_get_loop">
+<description>
+Gets whether @animation should loop indefinitely when it reaches the end.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the animation loops forever, %FALSE otherwise
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_visual_get_best_depth">
<description>
Get the best available depth for the default GDK screen. "Best"
@@ -1426,6 +1434,30 @@ results in rendering artifacts.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_colors_store">
+<description>
+Changes the value of the first @ncolors colors in
+a private colormap. This function is obsolete and
+should not be used. See gdk_color_change().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="colors">
+<parameter_description> the new color values.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ncolors">
+<parameter_description> the number of colors to change.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_font_from_description_for_display">
<description>
Loads a #GdkFont based on a Pango font description for use on @display.
@@ -1672,33 +1704,22 @@ and locates the value in the array for a given axis use.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_option">
+<function name="gdk_color_white">
<description>
-Looks up @key in the list of options that may have been attached to the
- pixbuf when it was loaded, or that may have been attached by another
-function using gdk_pixbuf_set_option().
-
-For instance, the ANI loader provides "Title" and "Artist" options.
-The ICO, XBM, and XPM loaders provide "x_hot" and "y_hot" hot-spot
-options for cursor definitions. The PNG loader provides the tEXt ancillary
-chunk key/value pairs as options. Since 2.12, the TIFF and JPEG loaders
-return an "orientation" option string that corresponds to the embedded
-TIFF/Exif orientation tag (if present).
-
+Return value: %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the location to store the color.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the value associated with @key. This is a nul-terminated
-string that should not be freed or %NULL if @key was not found.
+<return> %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
</return>
</function>
@@ -2291,24 +2312,66 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_colors_store">
+<function name="gdk_window_get_root_coords">
<description>
-Changes the value of the first @ncolors colors in
-a private colormap. This function is obsolete and
-should not be used. See gdk_color_change().
+Obtains the position of a window position in root
+window coordinates. This is similar to
+gdk_window_get_origin() but allows you go pass
+in any position in the window, not just the origin.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="colors">
-<parameter_description> the new color values.
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate in window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ncolors">
-<parameter_description> the number of colors to change.
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate in window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_x">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_y">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="GdkWindow">
+<description>
+The ::from-embedder signal is emitted to translate coordinates
+in the embedder of an offscreen window to the offscreen window.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the offscreen window on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embedder-x">
+<parameter_description> x coordinate in the embedder window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embedder-y">
+<parameter_description> y coordinate in the embedder window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offscreen-x">
+<parameter_description> return location for the x coordinate in the offscreen window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offscreen-y">
+<parameter_description> return location for the y coordinate in the offscreen window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2354,6 +2417,25 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder">
+<description>
+Gets the window that @window is embedded in.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the embedding #GdkWindow, or %NULL if @window is not an
+embedded offscreen window
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_mbstowcs">
<description>
Converts a multi-byte string to a wide character string.
@@ -2455,6 +2537,20 @@ device coordinates.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_geometry_changed">
+<description>
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_threads_add_timeout_full">
<description>
Sets a function to be called at regular intervals holding the GDK lock,
@@ -2507,30 +2603,6 @@ GTK+; to be safe, call it before gtk_init().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_string_measure">
-<description>
-Determines the distance from the origin to the rightmost
-portion of a nul-terminated string when drawn. This is not the
-correct value for determining the origin of the next
-portion when drawing text in multiple pieces.
-See gdk_string_width().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the nul-terminated string to measure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the right bearing of the string in pixels.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_draw_pixbuf">
<description>
Renders a rectangular portion of a pixbuf to a drawable. The destination
@@ -2542,9 +2614,6 @@ gdk_drawable_set_colormap().
On older X servers, rendering pixbufs with an alpha channel involves round
trips to the X server, and may be somewhat slow.
-The clip mask of @gc is ignored, but clip rectangles and clip regions work
-fine.
-
If GDK is built with the Sun mediaLib library, the gdk_draw_pixbuf
function is accelerated using mediaLib, which provides hardware
acceleration on Intel, AMD, and Sparc chipsets. If desired, mediaLib
@@ -2610,7 +2679,8 @@ Since: 2.2
<function name="gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom_for_display">
<description>
Converts from a #GdkAtom to the X atom for a #GdkDisplay
-with the same string value.
+with the same string value. The special value %GDK_NONE
+is converted to %None.
</description>
@@ -2620,11 +2690,11 @@ with the same string value.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="atom">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkAtom
+<parameter_description> A #GdkAtom, or %GDK_NONE
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the X atom corresponding to @atom.
+<return> the X atom corresponding to @atom, or %None
Since: 2.2
</return>
@@ -2650,13 +2720,13 @@ likely to change in future releases of GDK.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="real_drawable">
-<parameter_description> location to store the drawable to which drawing should be
+<parameter_description> location to store the drawable to which drawing should be
done.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x_offset">
<parameter_description> location to store the X offset between coordinates in @window,
-and the underlying window system primitive coordinates for
+and the underlying window system primitive coordinates for
* real_drawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -2707,18 +2777,19 @@ Gets the current file style for the GC
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_get_default">
+<function name="gdk_event_get_time">
<description>
-Gets the default screen for the default display. (See
-gdk_display_get_default ()).
-
+returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME. If @event is %NULL, returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
+Return value: time stamp field from @event
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if there is no default display.
-
-Since: 2.2
+<return> time stamp field from @event
</return>
</function>
@@ -2761,6 +2832,35 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_set_stipple">
+<description>
+Sets the stipple for one render part (foreground, background, underline,
+etc.) Note that this is overwritten when iterating through the individual
+styled runs of a #PangoLayout or #PangoLayoutLine. This function is thus
+only useful when you call low level functions like pango_renderer_draw_glyphs()
+directly, or in the 'prepare_run' virtual function of a subclass of
+#GdkPangoRenderer.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="gdk_renderer">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPangoRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="part">
+<parameter_description> the part to render with the stipple
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stipple">
+<parameter_description> the new stipple value.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_event_get_axis">
<description>
Extract the axis value for a particular axis use from
@@ -2877,14 +2977,13 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_get_update_area">
+<function name="gdk_window_clear_area_e">
<description>
-Transfers ownership of the update area from @window to the caller
-of the function. That is, after calling this function, @window will
-no longer have an invalid/dirty region; the update area is removed
-from @window and handed to you. If a window has no update area,
-gdk_window_get_update_area() returns %NULL. You are responsible for
-calling gdk_region_destroy() on the returned region if it's non-%NULL.
+Like gdk_window_clear_area(), but also generates an expose event for
+the cleared area.
+
+This function has a stupid name because it dates back to the mists
+time, pre-GDK-1.0.
</description>
@@ -2893,9 +2992,24 @@ calling gdk_region_destroy() on the returned region if it's non-%NULL.
<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x coordinate of rectangle to clear
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y coordinate of rectangle to clear
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of rectangle to clear
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of rectangle to clear
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the update area for @window
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_pixbuf">
@@ -3063,12 +3177,26 @@ allocated for it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_get_pointer">
+<function name="gdk_font_id">
<description>
-Gets the current location of the pointer and the current modifier
-mask for a given display.
+Return value: the numeric X Font ID
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the numeric X Font ID
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="_gdk_event_queue_insert_after">
+<description>
+Appends an event before the specified event, or if it isn't in
+the queue, onto the tail of the event queue.
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3076,25 +3204,19 @@ Since: 2.2
<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> location to store the screen that the
-cursor is on, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="sibling">
+<parameter_description> Append after this event.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> location to store root window X coordinate of pointer, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store root window Y coordinate of pointer, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> location to store current modifier mask, or %NULL
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> Event to append.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the newly appended list node.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_lookup">
@@ -3198,27 +3320,25 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_string_height">
+<function name="gdk_window_set_events">
<description>
-Determines the total height of a given nul-terminated
-string. This value is not generally useful, because you
-cannot determine how this total height will be drawn in
-relation to the baseline. See gdk_string_extents().
-
+The event mask for a window determines which events will be reported
+for that window. For example, an event mask including #GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK
+means the window should report button press events. The event mask
+is the bitwise OR of values from the #GdkEventMask enumeration.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the nul-terminated string to measure.
+<parameter name="event_mask">
+<parameter_description> event mask for @window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the height of the string in pixels.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_set_keep_above">
@@ -3282,6 +3402,24 @@ updates sometime after application startup time.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="_gdk_gc_get_clip_mask">
+<description>
+Gets the current clip mask for @gc, if any.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the clip mask for the GC, or %NULL.
+(if a clip region is set, the return will be %NULL)
+This value is owned by the GC and must not be freed.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_drag_context_ref">
<description>
Deprecated function; use g_object_ref() instead.
@@ -3334,25 +3472,27 @@ value is owned by the GC and must not be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_set_events">
+<function name="gdk_string_height">
<description>
-The event mask for a window determines which events will be reported
-for that window. For example, an event mask including #GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK
-means the window should report button press events. The event mask
-is the bitwise OR of values from the #GdkEventMask enumeration.
+Determines the total height of a given nul-terminated
+string. This value is not generally useful, because you
+cannot determine how this total height will be drawn in
+relation to the baseline. See gdk_string_extents().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event_mask">
-<parameter_description> event mask for @window
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the nul-terminated string to measure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the height of the string in pixels.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_query_visual_types">
@@ -3438,30 +3578,6 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_event_get_root_coords">
-<description>
-Extract the root window relative x/y coordinates from an event.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x_root">
-<parameter_description> location to put root window x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y_root">
-<parameter_description> location to put root window y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the event delivered root window coordinates
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_query_depths">
<description>
This function returns the available bit depths for the default
@@ -3625,40 +3741,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream">
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_format">
<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from an input stream.
-
-The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
- error will be set. The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation
-from another thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error
-%GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED will be returned. Other possible errors are in
-the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
-
-The stream is not closed.
+Obtains the available information about the format of the
+currently loading image file.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> a #GInputStream to load the pixbuf from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cancellable">
-<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
+<parameter name="loader">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or %NULL if any of several error
-conditions occurred: the file could not be opened, the image format is
-not supported, there was not enough memory to allocate the image buffer,
-the stream contained invalid data, or the operation was cancelled.
+<return> A #GdkPixbufFormat or %NULL. The return value is owned
+by GdkPixbuf and should not be freed.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -3810,6 +3909,41 @@ Convert from an X atom for the default display to the corresponding
</return>
</function>
+<function name="_gdk_window_destroy_hierarchy">
+<description>
+Internal function to destroy a window. Like gdk_window_destroy(),
+but does not drop the reference count created by gdk_window_new().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="recursing">
+<parameter_description> If TRUE, then this is being called because a parent
+was destroyed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="recursing_native">
+<parameter_description> If TRUE, then this is being called because a native parent
+was destroyed. This generally means that the call to the
+windowing system to destroy the window can be omitted, since
+it will be destroyed as a result of the parent being destroyed.
+Unless @foreign_destroy.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="foreign_destroy">
+<parameter_description> If TRUE, the window or a parent was destroyed by some
+external agency. The window has already been destroyed and no
+windowing system calls should be made. (This may never happen
+for some windowing systems.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_gc_set_clip_mask">
<description>
Sets the clip mask for a graphics context from a bitmap.
@@ -3936,18 +4070,30 @@ by GDK and must not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_new">
+<function name="gdk_drawable_set_colormap">
<description>
-Creates a new #GdkAppLaunchContext.
+Sets the colormap associated with @drawable. Normally this will
+happen automatically when the drawable is created; you only need to
+use this function if the drawable-creating function did not have a
+way to determine the colormap, and you then use drawable operations
+that require a colormap. The colormap for all drawables and
+graphics contexts you intend to use together should match. i.e.
+when using a #GdkGC to draw to a drawable, or copying one drawable
+to another, the colormaps should match.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GdkAppLaunchContext
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_begin_paint_region">
@@ -4509,15 +4655,17 @@ Deprecated: Use g_object_unref() instead.
<function name="gdk_test_render_sync">
<description>
-This function retrives a pixel from @window to force the windowing
+This function retrieves a pixel from @window to force the windowing
system to carry out any pending rendering commands.
This function is intended to be used to syncronize with rendering
pipelines, to benchmark windowing system rendering operations.
+Since: 2.14
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a mapped GdkWindow
+<parameter_description> a mapped #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4595,6 +4743,10 @@ This is not public API and must not be used by applications.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for which to get the grab information
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="grab_window">
<parameter_description> location to store current grab window
</parameter_description>
@@ -4685,11 +4837,11 @@ This function is called by the drag source.
<description>
Like gdk_window_shape_combine_mask(), but the shape applies
only to event handling. Mouse events which happen while
-the pointer position corresponds to an unset bit in the
+the pointer position corresponds to an unset bit in the
mask will be passed on the window below @window.
An input shape is typically used with RGBA windows.
-The alpha channel of the window defines which pixels are
+The alpha channel of the window defines which pixels are
invisible and allows for nicely antialiased borders,
and the input shape controls where the window is
"clickable".
@@ -4709,7 +4861,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> shape mask
+<parameter_description> shape mask, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -4741,44 +4893,22 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask">
+<function name="gdk_drawable_get_depth">
<description>
-Creates a pixmap and a mask bitmap which are returned in the @pixmap_return
-and @mask_return arguments, respectively, and renders a pixbuf and its
-corresponding thresholded alpha mask to them. This is merely a convenience
-function; applications that need to render pixbufs with dither offsets or to
-given drawables should use gdk_draw_pixbuf() and gdk_pixbuf_render_threshold_alpha().
+Obtains the bit depth of the drawable, that is, the number of bits
+that make up a pixel in the drawable's visual. Examples are 8 bits
+per pixel, 24 bits per pixel, etc.
-The pixmap that is created is created for the colormap returned
-by gdk_rgb_get_colormap(). You normally will want to instead use
-the actual colormap for a widget, and use
-gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask_for_colormap().
-
-If the pixbuf does not have an alpha channel, then * mask_return will be set
-to %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap_return">
-<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created pixmap,
-or %NULL if the pixmap is not needed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask_return">
-<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created mask,
-or %NULL if the mask is not needed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="alpha_threshold">
-<parameter_description> Threshold value for opacity values.
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> number of bits per pixel
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_manager_list_displays">
@@ -4812,22 +4942,29 @@ Return value: the associated Gdk object, which may be a #GdkPixmap,
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the associated Gdk object, which may be a #GdkPixmap,
-a #GdkWindow or a #GdkFont.
+a #GdkWindow or a #GdkFont or %NULL if no object is associated
+with the X id.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_merge_child_input_shapes">
+<function name="_gdk_window_invalidate_for_expose">
<description>
-Merges the input shape masks for any child windows into the
-input shape mask for @window. i.e. the union of all input masks
-for @window and its children will become the new input mask
-for @window. See gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask().
+Adds @region to the update area for @window. The update area is the
+region that needs to be redrawn, or "dirty region." The call
+gdk_window_process_updates() sends one or more expose events to the
+window, which together cover the entire update area. An
+application would normally redraw the contents of @window in
+response to those expose events.
-This function is distinct from gdk_window_set_child_input_shapes()
-because it includes @window's input shape mask in the set of
-shapes to be merged.
+GDK will call gdk_window_process_all_updates() on your behalf
+whenever your program returns to the main loop and becomes idle, so
+normally there's no need to do that manually, you just need to
+invalidate regions that you know should be redrawn.
-Since: 2.10
+This version of invalidation is used when you recieve expose events
+from the native window system. It exposes the native window, plus
+any non-native child windows (but not native child windows, as those would
+have gotten their own expose events).
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4835,10 +4972,46 @@ Since: 2.10
<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="region">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_event_send_client_message_for_display">
+<description>
+On X11, sends an X ClientMessage event to a given window. On
+Windows, sends a message registered with the name
+GDK_WIN32_CLIENT_MESSAGE.
+
+This could be used for communicating between different
+applications, though the amount of data is limited to 20 bytes on
+X11, and to just four bytes on Windows.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for the window where the message is to be sent.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEvent to send, which should be a #GdkEventClient.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="winid">
+<parameter_description> the window to send the client message to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> non-zero on success.
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_begin_resize_drag">
<description>
Begins a window resize operation (for a toplevel window).
@@ -5002,51 +5175,57 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the pointer is currently grabbed by this application.*
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_format">
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream">
<description>
-Obtains the available information about the format of the
-currently loading image file.
+Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from an input stream.
+
+The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
+ error will be set. The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation
+from another thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error
+%GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED will be returned. Other possible errors are in
+the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
+
+The stream is not closed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
+<parameter name="stream">
+<parameter_description> a #GInputStream to load the pixbuf from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cancellable">
+<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Return location for an error
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbufFormat or %NULL. The return value is owned
-by GdkPixbuf and should not be freed.
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or %NULL if any of several error
+conditions occurred: the file could not be opened, the image format is
+not supported, there was not enough memory to allocate the image buffer,
+the stream contained invalid data, or the operation was cancelled.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_draw_point">
+<function name="gdk_pango_attr_embossed_new">
<description>
-Draws a point, using the foreground color and other attributes of
-the #GdkGC.
+Creates a new attribute flagging a region as embossed or not.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable (a #GdkWindow or a #GdkPixmap).
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the point.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the point.
+<parameter name="embossed">
+<parameter_description> if the region should be embossed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> new #PangoAttribute
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_set_icon_name">
@@ -5056,6 +5235,11 @@ name they display in their titlebar. Most of the time this is a bad
idea from a user interface standpoint. But you can set such a name
with this function, if you like.
+After calling this with a non-%NULL @name, calls to gdk_window_set_title()
+will not update the icon title.
+
+Using %NULL for @name unsets the icon title; further calls to
+gdk_window_set_title() will again update the icon title as well.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5262,7 +5446,6 @@ keep @window above @parent.
See gtk_window_set_transient_for() if you're using #GtkWindow or
#GtkDialog.
-
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
@@ -5380,55 +5563,47 @@ previously called gdk_window_set_transient_for()
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_window_destroy_hierarchy">
+<function name="gdk_drag_get_protocol_for_display">
<description>
-Internal function to destroy a window. Like gdk_window_destroy(),
-but does not drop the reference count created by gdk_window_new().
+Finds out the DND protocol supported by a window.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay where the destination window resides
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="recursing">
-<parameter_description> If TRUE, then this is being called because a parent
-was destroyed. This generally means that the call to the
-windowing system to destroy the window can be omitted, since
-it will be destroyed as a result of the parent being destroyed.
-Unless @foreign_destroy.
+<parameter name="xid">
+<parameter_description> the windowing system id of the destination window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="foreign_destroy">
-<parameter_description> If TRUE, the window or a parent was destroyed by some
-external agency. The window has already been destroyed and no
-windowing system calls should be made. (This may never happen
-for some windowing systems.)
+<parameter name="protocol">
+<parameter_description> location where the supported DND protocol is returned.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the windowing system id of the window where the drop should happen. This
+may be @xid or the id of a proxy window, or zero if @xid doesn't
+support Drag and Drop.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_set_display">
+<function name="gdk_font_ref">
<description>
-Sets the display on which applications will be launched when
-using this context. See also gdk_app_launch_context_set_screen().
+Increases the reference count of a font by one.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkAppLaunchContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> @font
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_keyboard_grab_info_libgtk_only">
@@ -5439,6 +5614,10 @@ This is not public API and must not be used by applications.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the display for which to get the grab information
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="grab_window">
<parameter_description> location to store current grab window
</parameter_description>
@@ -5474,62 +5653,54 @@ or %NULL if there is none.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_draw_layout_line">
+<function name="gdk_draw_lines">
<description>
-Render a #PangoLayoutLine onto an GDK drawable
-
-If the layout's #PangoContext has a transformation matrix set, then
- x and @y specify the position of the left edge of the baseline
-(left is in before-tranform user coordinates) in after-transform
-device coordinates.
+Draws a series of lines connecting the given points.
+The way in which joins between lines are draw is determined by the
+#GdkCapStyle value in the #GdkGC. This can be set with
+gdk_gc_set_line_attributes().
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> the drawable on which to draw the line
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable (a #GdkWindow or a #GdkPixmap).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> base graphics to use
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position of start of string (in pixels)
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position of baseline (in pixels)
+<parameter name="points">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint structures specifying the endpoints of the
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="line">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoLayoutLine
+<parameter name="n_points">
+<parameter_description> the size of the @points array.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_peek_event">
+<function name="gdk_window_end_paint">
<description>
-Gets a copy of the first #GdkEvent in the @display's event queue, without
-removing the event from the queue. (Note that this function will
-not get more events from the windowing system. It only checks the events
-that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.)
+Indicates that the backing store created by the most recent call to
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() should be copied onscreen and
+deleted, leaving the next-most-recent backing store or no backing
+store at all as the active paint region. See
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() for full details. It is an error to
+call this function without a matching
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() first.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a copy of the first #GdkEvent on the event queue, or %NULL
-if no events are in the queue. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with
-gdk_event_free().
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_gc_set_rgb_bg_color">
@@ -5888,37 +6059,24 @@ Return value: the size of the system's default colormap.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_colormap_alloc_color">
+<function name="gdk_gc_set_stipple">
<description>
-Allocates a single color from a colormap.
-
+Set the stipple bitmap for a graphics context. The
+stipple will only be used if the fill mode is
+%GDK_STIPPLED or %GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> the color to allocate. On return the
-<structfield>pixel</structfield> field will be
-filled in if allocation succeeds.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="writeable">
-<parameter_description> If %TRUE, the color is allocated writeable
-(their values can later be changed using gdk_color_change()).
-Writeable colors cannot be shared between applications.
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="best_match">
-<parameter_description> If %TRUE, GDK will attempt to do matching against
-existing colors if the color cannot be allocated as requested.
+<parameter name="stipple">
+<parameter_description> the new stipple bitmap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_beep">
@@ -6046,7 +6204,7 @@ Since: 2.2
<function name="gdk_xid_table_lookup_for_display">
<description>
-Returns: a GDK object associated with the given X id.
+Return value: the associated Gdk object, which may be a #GdkPixmap,
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6059,7 +6217,9 @@ Returns: a GDK object associated with the given X id.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a GDK object associated with the given X id.
+<return> the associated Gdk object, which may be a #GdkPixmap,
+a #GdkWindow or a #GdkFont or %NULL if no object is associated
+with the X id.
Since: 2.2
</return>
@@ -6174,32 +6334,6 @@ to all children of the root window.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drawable_set_colormap">
-<description>
-Sets the colormap associated with @drawable. Normally this will
-happen automatically when the drawable is created; you only need to
-use this function if the drawable-creating function did not have a
-way to determine the colormap, and you then use drawable operations
-that require a colormap. The colormap for all drawables and
-graphics contexts you intend to use together should match. i.e.
-when using a #GdkGC to draw to a drawable, or copying one drawable
-to another, the colormaps should match.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_draw_arc">
<description>
Draws an arc or a filled 'pie slice'. The arc is defined by the bounding
@@ -6477,33 +6611,33 @@ window
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_resize">
+<function name="gdk_rectangle_intersect">
<description>
-Resizes @window; for toplevel windows, asks the window manager to resize
-the window. The window manager may not allow the resize. When using GTK+,
-use gtk_window_resize() instead of this low-level GDK function.
-
-Windows may not be resized below 1x1.
+Calculates the intersection of two rectangles. It is allowed for
+ dest to be the same as either @src1 or @src2. If the rectangles
+do not intersect, @dest's width and height is set to 0 and its x
+and y values are undefined. If you are only interested in whether
+the rectangles intersect, but not in the intersecting area itself,
+pass %NULL for @dest.
-If you're also planning to move the window, use gdk_window_move_resize()
-to both move and resize simultaneously, for a nicer visual effect.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="src1">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> new width of the window
+<parameter name="src2">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> new height of the window
+<parameter name="dest">
+<parameter_description> return location for the intersection of @src1 and @src2, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the rectangles intersect.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="GdkScreen">
@@ -6702,22 +6836,31 @@ Examples of keyvals are #GDK_a, #GDK_Enter, #GDK_F1, etc.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_colormap_get_screen">
+<function name="gdk_draw_point">
<description>
-Gets the screen for which this colormap was created.
-
+Draws a point, using the foreground color and other attributes of
+the #GdkGC.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cmap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable (a #GdkWindow or a #GdkPixmap).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the point.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the point.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the screen for which this colormap was created.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_store_clipboard">
@@ -6842,6 +6985,26 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_set_loop">
+<description>
+Sets whether @animation should loop indefinitely when it reaches the end.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="loop">
+<parameter_description> whether to loop the animation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_x11_screen_lookup_visual">
<description>
Looks up the #GdkVisual for a particular screen and X Visual ID.
@@ -6956,44 +7119,47 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drop_reply">
+<function name="gdk_screen_get_display">
<description>
-Accepts or rejects a drop.
+Gets the display to which the @screen belongs.
-This function is called by the drag destination in response
-to a drop initiated by the drag source.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ok">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the drop is accepted.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> the timestamp for this operation.
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the display to which @screen belongs
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_get_display">
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_set_option">
<description>
-Gets the display to which the @screen belongs.
+Attaches a key/value pair as an option to a #GdkPixbuf. If %key already
+exists in the list of options attached to @pixbuf, the new value is
+ignored and %FALSE is returned.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the display to which @screen belongs
+<return> %TRUE on success.
Since: 2.2
</return>
@@ -7489,7 +7655,7 @@ is gtk_widget_create_pango_layout().
<function name="gdk_window_process_updates">
<description>
-Sends one or more expose events to @window. The areas in each
+Sends one or more expose events to @window. The areas in each
expose event will cover the entire update area for the window (see
gdk_window_invalidate_region() for details). Normally GDK calls
gdk_window_process_all_updates() on your behalf, so there's no
@@ -7513,20 +7679,25 @@ this is useful to produce nicer scrolling behavior, for example.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_focus">
+<function name="gdk_screen_set_font_options">
<description>
-Sets keyboard focus to @window. In most cases, gtk_window_present()
-should be used on a #GtkWindow, rather than calling this function.
+Sets the default font options for the screen. These
+options will be set on any #PangoContext's newly created
+with gdk_pango_context_get_for_screen(). Changing the
+default set of font options does not affect contexts that
+have already been created.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="timestamp">
-<parameter_description> timestamp of the event triggering the window focus
+<parameter name="options">
+<parameter_description> a #cairo_font_options_t, or %NULL to unset any
+previously set default font options.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7614,58 +7785,46 @@ Call g_list_free() on the return value when you're finished with it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_get_frame_extents">
+<function name="gdk_drag_drop_succeeded">
<description>
-Obtains the bounding box of the window, including window manager
-titlebar/borders if any. The frame position is given in root window
-coordinates. To get the position of the window itself (rather than
-the frame) in root window coordinates, use gdk_window_get_origin().
-
+Return value: %TRUE if the drop was successful.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rect">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to fill with bounding box of the window frame
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the drop was successful.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_colormap_query_color">
+<function name="gdk_set_pointer_hooks">
<description>
-Locates the RGB color in @colormap corresponding to the given
-hardware pixel @pixel. @pixel must be a valid pixel in the
-colormap; it's a programmer error to call this function with a
-pixel which is not in the colormap. Hardware pixels are normally
-obtained from gdk_colormap_alloc_colors(), or from a #GdkImage. (A
-#GdkImage contains image data in hardware format, a #GdkPixbuf
-contains image data in a canonical 24-bit RGB format.)
+This function allows for hooking into the operation
+of getting the current location of the pointer. This
+is only useful for such low-level tools as an
+event recorder. Applications should never have any
+reason to use this facility.
-This function is rarely useful; it's used for example to
-implement the eyedropper feature in #GtkColorSelection.
+This function is not multihead safe. For multihead operation,
+see gdk_display_set_pointer_hooks().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixel">
-<parameter_description> pixel value in hardware display format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="result">
-<parameter_description> #GdkColor with red, green, blue fields initialized
+<parameter name="new_hooks">
+<parameter_description> a table of pointers to functions for getting
+quantities related to the current pointer position,
+or %NULL to restore the default table.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the previous pointer hook table
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_directfb_visual_by_format">
@@ -7785,23 +7944,6 @@ as if the event had no state field.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_supports_cursor_color">
-<description>
-Returns: whether cursors can have multiple colors.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether cursors can have multiple colors.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_gc_get_colormap">
<description>
Retrieves the colormap for a given GC, if it exists.
@@ -7904,11 +8046,11 @@ Returns: %TRUE if there were any entries
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keys">
-<parameter_description> return location for array of #GdkKeymapKey, or NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for array of #GdkKeymapKey, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyvals">
-<parameter_description> return location for array of keyvals, or NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for array of keyvals, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_entries">
@@ -8054,29 +8196,24 @@ allocated.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_set_font_options">
+<function name="gdk_region_equal">
<description>
-Sets the default font options for the screen. These
-options will be set on any #PangoContext's newly created
-with gdk_pango_context_get_for_screen(). Changing the
-default set of font options does not affect contexts that
-have already been created.
+Finds out if the two regions are the same.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="region1">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="options">
-<parameter_description> a #cairo_font_options_t, or %NULL to unset any
-previously set default font options.
+<parameter name="region2">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @region1 and @region2 are equal.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_region_shrink">
@@ -8149,29 +8286,48 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_new">
+<function name="GdkPixbufSimpleAnim">
<description>
-Creates a new, empty animation.
+Whether the animation should loop when it reaches the end.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the animation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the animation
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_devices_list">
+<description>
+Return value: a list of #GdkDevice
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a list of #GdkDevice
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_region_rect_equal">
+<description>
+Finds out if a regions is the same as a rectangle.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="region">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="rate">
-<parameter_description> the speed of the animation, in frames per second
+<parameter name="rectangle">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
+<return> %TRUE if @region and @rectangle are equal.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -8266,100 +8422,43 @@ move, then resize, if you don't use gdk_window_move_resize().)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_cursor_new_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_screen_list_visuals">
<description>
-Creates a new cursor from the set of builtin cursors.
-Some useful ones are:
-<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_ptr.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_PTR (right-facing arrow)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="crosshair.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_CROSSHAIR (crosshair)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="xterm.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_XTERM (I-beam)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="watch.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_WATCH (busy)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="fleur.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_FLEUR (for moving objects)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand1.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND1 (a right-pointing hand)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand2.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND2 (a left-pointing hand)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="left_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_LEFT_SIDE (resize left side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_SIDE (resize right side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_LEFT_CORNER (resize northwest corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_RIGHT_CORNER (resize northeast corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_LEFT_CORNER (resize southwest corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER (resize southeast corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_SIDE (resize top side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_SIDE (resize bottom side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_h_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW (move vertical splitter)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_v_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW (move horizontal splitter)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-#GDK_BLANK_CURSOR (Blank cursor). Since 2.16
-</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
+Lists the available visuals for the specified @screen.
+A visual describes a hardware image data format.
+For example, a visual might support 24-bit color, or 8-bit color,
+and might expect pixels to be in a certain format.
+
+Call g_list_free() on the return value when you're finished with it.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for which the cursor will be created
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_type">
-<parameter_description> cursor to create
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GdkCursor
+<return> a list of visuals; the list must be freed, but not its
+contents
Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_set_child_shapes">
+<function name="gdk_x11_font_get_xfont">
<description>
-Sets the shape mask of @window to the union of shape masks
-for all children of @window, ignoring the shape mask of @window
-itself. Contrast with gdk_window_merge_child_shapes() which includes
-the shape mask of @window in the masks to be merged.
+Return value: an Xlib <type>XFontStruct*</type> or an <type>XFontSet</type>.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an Xlib <type>XFontStruct*</type> or an <type>XFontSet</type>.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_pointer_ungrab">
@@ -8661,7 +8760,7 @@ fine grained control over which children are invalidated.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="invalidate_children">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to also invalidate child windows
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to also invalidate child windows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -8773,53 +8872,56 @@ gdk_window_clear().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_get_rgba_colormap">
+<function name="gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint">
<description>
-Gets a colormap to use for creating windows or pixmaps with an
-alpha channel. The windowing system on which GTK+ is running
-may not support this capability, in which case %NULL will
-be returned. Even if a non-%NULL value is returned, its
-possible that the window's alpha channel won't be honored
-when displaying the window on the screen: in particular, for
-X an appropriate windowing manager and compositing manager
-must be running to provide appropriate display.
-
-This functionality is not implemented in the Windows backend.
+This function is specific to the X11 backend of GDK, and indicates
+whether the window manager supports a certain hint from the
+Extended Window Manager Hints Specification. You can find this
+specification on
+<ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org">http://www.freedesktop.org</ulink>.
-For setting an overall opacity for a top-level window, see
-gdk_window_set_opacity().
+When using this function, keep in mind that the window manager
+can change over time; so you shouldn't use this function in
+a way that impacts persistent application state. A common bug
+is that your application can start up before the window manager
+does when the user logs in, and before the window manager starts
+gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint() will return %FALSE for every property.
+You can monitor the window_manager_changed signal on #GdkScreen to detect
+a window manager change.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property">
+<parameter_description> a property atom.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a colormap to use for windows with an alpha channel
-or %NULL if the capability is not available.
+<return> %TRUE if the window manager supports @property
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_xgrab_check_button_event">
+<function name="gdk_display_supports_cursor_color">
<description>
-Checks to see if a button event starts or ends an implicit grab.
+Returns: whether cursors can have multiple colors.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> an XEvent of type ButtonPress or ButtonRelease
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether cursors can have multiple colors.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_pixbuf_render_threshold_alpha">
@@ -8872,28 +8974,6 @@ other values will be painted as one.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_font_equal">
-<description>
-Compares two fonts for equality. Single fonts compare equal
-if they have the same X font ID. This operation does
-not currently work correctly for fontsets.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="fonta">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fontb">
-<parameter_description> another #GdkFont.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the fonts are equal.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_pango_context_set_colormap">
<description>
This function used to set the colormap to be used for drawing with
@@ -9006,20 +9086,46 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drawable_get_visual">
+<function name="_gdk_gc_update_context">
<description>
-Gets the #GdkVisual describing the pixel format of @drawable.
-
+Set the attributes of a cairo context to match those of a #GdkGC
+as far as possible. Some aspects of a #GdkGC, such as clip masks
+and functions other than %GDK_COPY are not currently handled.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cr">
+<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="override_foreground">
+<parameter_description> a foreground color to use to override the
+foreground color of the GC
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="override_stipple">
+<parameter_description> a stipple pattern to use to override the
+stipple from the GC. If this is present and the fill mode
+of the GC isn't %GDK_STIPPLED or %GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED
+the fill mode will be forced to %GDK_STIPPLED
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gc_changed">
+<parameter_description> pass %FALSE if the @gc has not changed since the
+last call to this function
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target_drawable">
+<parameter_description> The drawable you're drawing in. If passed in
+this is used for client side window clip emulation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkVisual
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_visual_get_best_with_depth">
@@ -9041,20 +9147,24 @@ be freed. %NULL may be returned if no visual supports @depth.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pango_attr_embossed_new">
+<function name="GdkDisplayManager">
<description>
-Creates a new attribute flagging a region as embossed or not.
+The ::display_opened signal is emitted when a display is opened.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="embossed">
-<parameter_description> if the region should be embossed
+<parameter name="display_manager">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the opened display
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> new #PangoAttribute
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_width">
@@ -9570,33 +9680,33 @@ Compares two colors.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_rectangle_intersect">
+<function name="gdk_window_resize">
<description>
-Calculates the intersection of two rectangles. It is allowed for
- dest to be the same as either @src1 or @src2. If the rectangles
-do not intersect, @dest's width and height is set to 0 and its x
-and y values are undefined. If you are only interested in whether
-the rectangles intersect, but not in the intersecting area itself,
-pass %NULL for @dest.
+Resizes @window; for toplevel windows, asks the window manager to resize
+the window. The window manager may not allow the resize. When using GTK+,
+use gtk_window_resize() instead of this low-level GDK function.
+Windows may not be resized below 1x1.
+
+If you're also planning to move the window, use gdk_window_move_resize()
+to both move and resize simultaneously, for a nicer visual effect.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="src1">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="src2">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> new width of the window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> return location for the intersection of @src1 and @src2, or %NULL
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> new height of the window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the rectangles intersect.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_cairo_rectangle">
@@ -9795,6 +9905,26 @@ without regard to event masks.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_cairo_set_source_color">
+<description>
+Sets the specified #GdkColor as the source color of @cr.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cr">
+<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_region_union">
<description>
Sets the area of @source1 to the union of the areas of @source1 and
@@ -9815,14 +9945,45 @@ either @source1 or @source2.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_devices_list">
+<function name="gdk_device_get_history">
<description>
-Return value: a list of #GdkDevice
+Obtains the motion history for a device; given a starting and
+ending timestamp, return all events in the motion history for
+the device in the given range of time. Some windowing systems
+do not support motion history, in which case, %FALSE will
+be returned. (This is not distinguishable from the case where
+motion history is supported and no events were found.)
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the window with respect to which which the event coordinates will be reported
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> starting timestamp for range of events to return
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stop">
+<parameter_description> ending timestamp for the range of events to return
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="events">
+<parameter_description> location to store a newly-allocated array of #GdkTimeCoord, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_events">
+<parameter_description> location to store the length of @events, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a list of #GdkDevice
+<return> %TRUE if the windowing system supports motion history and
+at least one event was found.
</return>
</function>
@@ -9977,24 +10138,28 @@ Return the best available visual type for the default GDK screen.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_cairo_set_source_color">
+<function name="gdk_event_get_root_coords">
<description>
-Sets the specified #GdkColor as the source color of @cr.
+Extract the root window relative x/y coordinates from an event.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cr">
-<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor
+<parameter name="x_root">
+<parameter_description> location to put root window x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y_root">
+<parameter_description> location to put root window y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the event delivered root window coordinates
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_get_root_origin">
@@ -10585,22 +10750,6 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_font_ref">
-<description>
-Increases the reference count of a font by one.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> @font
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_set_geometry_hints">
<description>
Sets the geometry hints for @window. Hints flagged in @geom_mask
@@ -10644,6 +10793,40 @@ appropriate sizes.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_display_get_pointer">
+<description>
+Gets the current location of the pointer and the current modifier
+mask for a given display.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> location to store the screen that the
+cursor is on, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> location to store root window X coordinate of pointer, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store root window Y coordinate of pointer, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> location to store current modifier mask, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_event_send_client_message">
<description>
Sends an X ClientMessage event to a given window (which must be
@@ -10667,45 +10850,39 @@ though the amount of data is limited to 20 bytes.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_colors_alloc">
+<function name="gdk_x11_display_set_cursor_theme">
<description>
-Allocates colors from a colormap. This function
-is obsolete. See gdk_colormap_alloc_colors().
-For full documentation of the fields, see
-the Xlib documentation for <function>XAllocColorCells()</function>.
+Sets the cursor theme from which the images for cursor
+should be taken.
+
+If the windowing system supports it, existing cursors created
+with gdk_cursor_new(), gdk_cursor_new_for_display() and
+gdk_cursor_new_for_name() are updated to reflect the theme
+change. Custom cursors constructed with gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap()
+or gdk_cursor_new_from_pixbuf() will have to be handled
+by the application (GTK+ applications can learn about
+cursor theme changes by listening for change notification
+for the corresponding #GtkSetting).
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="contiguous">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the colors should be allocated
-in contiguous color cells.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="planes">
-<parameter_description> an array in which to store the plane masks.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="nplanes">
-<parameter_description> the number of planes to allocate. (Or zero,
-to indicate that the color allocation should not be planar.)
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixels">
-<parameter_description> an array into which to store allocated pixel values.
+<parameter name="theme">
+<parameter_description> the name of the cursor theme to use, or %NULL to unset
+a previously set value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="npixels">
-<parameter_description> the number of pixels in each plane to allocate.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> the cursor size to use, or 0 to keep the previous size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the allocation was successful
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_hide">
@@ -10793,13 +10970,14 @@ gdk_drag_find_window().
<function name="gdk_test_simulate_button">
<description>
-This function is intended to be used in Gtk+ test programs.
+This function is intended to be used in GTK+ test programs.
It will warp the mouse pointer to the given (@x,@y) corrdinates
within @window and simulate a button press or release event.
Because the mouse pointer needs to be warped to the target
location, use of this function outside of test programs that
run in their own virtual windowing system (e.g. Xvfb) is not
recommended.
+
Also, gtk_test_simulate_button() is a fairly low level function,
for most testing purposes, gtk_test_widget_click() is the right
function to call which will generate a button press event followed
@@ -10809,7 +10987,7 @@ by its accompanying button release event.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> Gdk window to simulate a button event for.
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow to simulate a button event for.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -10833,7 +11011,10 @@ by its accompanying button release event.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> wether all actions neccessary for a button event simulation were carried out successfully.
+<return> whether all actions neccessary for a button event simulation
+were carried out successfully.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -10929,15 +11110,29 @@ already known to GTK+, otherwise warns and return
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GdkAppLaunchContext.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GdkAppLaunchContext
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_input_shape_combine_region">
<description>
Like gdk_window_shape_combine_region(), but the shape applies
only to event handling. Mouse events which happen while
-the pointer position corresponds to an unset bit in the
+the pointer position corresponds to an unset bit in the
mask will be passed on the window below @window.
An input shape is typically used with RGBA windows.
-The alpha channel of the window defines which pixels are
+The alpha channel of the window defines which pixels are
invisible and allows for nicely antialiased borders,
and the input shape controls where the window is
"clickable".
@@ -10972,6 +11167,29 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_ensure_native">
+<description>
+Tries to ensure that there is a window-system native window for this
+GdkWindow. This may fail in some situations, returning %FALSE.
+
+Offscreen window and children of them can never have native windows.
+
+Some backends may not support native child windows.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the window has a native window, %FALSE otherwise
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_set_title">
<description>
Sets the title of a toplevel window, to be displayed in the titlebar.
@@ -11040,40 +11258,20 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_threads_set_lock_functions">
+<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_set_drawable">
<description>
-Allows the application to replace the standard method that
-GDK uses to protect its data structures. Normally, GDK
-creates a single #GMutex that is locked by gdk_threads_enter(),
-and released by gdk_threads_leave(); using this function an
-application provides, instead, a function @enter_fn that is
-called by gdk_threads_enter() and a function @leave_fn that is
-called by gdk_threads_leave().
-
-The functions must provide at least same locking functionality
-as the default implementation, but can also do extra application
-specific processing.
-
-As an example, consider an application that has its own recursive
-lock that when held, holds the GTK+ lock as well. When GTK+ unlocks
-the GTK+ lock when entering a recursive main loop, the application
-must temporarily release its lock as well.
-
-Most threaded GTK+ apps won't need to use this method.
-
-This method must be called before gdk_threads_init(), and cannot
-be called multiple times.
+Sets the drawable the renderer draws to.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="enter_fn">
-<parameter_description> function called to guard GDK
+<parameter name="gdk_renderer">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPangoRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="leave_fn">
-<parameter_description> function called to release the guard
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> the new target drawable, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11100,21 +11298,26 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drag_drop_succeeded">
+<function name="gdk_window_get_frame_extents">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the drop was successful.
+Obtains the bounding box of the window, including window manager
+titlebar/borders if any. The frame position is given in root window
+coordinates. To get the position of the window itself (rather than
+the frame) in root window coordinates, use gdk_window_get_origin().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rect">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to fill with bounding box of the window frame
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the drop was successful.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_gc_set_fill">
@@ -11367,72 +11570,77 @@ the #GObject variant should be used instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_display_set_cursor_theme">
+<function name="gdk_x11_colormap_get_xcolormap">
<description>
-Sets the cursor theme from which the images for cursor
-should be taken.
-
-If the windowing system supports it, existing cursors created
-with gdk_cursor_new(), gdk_cursor_new_for_display() and
-gdk_cursor_new_for_name() are updated to reflect the theme
-change. Custom cursors constructed with gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap()
-or gdk_cursor_new_from_pixbuf() will have to be handled
-by the application (GTK+ applications can learn about
-cursor theme changes by listening for change notification
-for the corresponding #GtkSetting).
-
-Since: 2.8
+Return value: an Xlib <type>Colormap</type>.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="theme">
-<parameter_description> the name of the cursor theme to use, or %NULL to unset
-a previously set value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> the cursor size to use, or 0 to keep the previous size
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an Xlib <type>Colormap</type>.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_colormap_get_xcolormap">
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>Colormap</type>.
+Creates a pixmap and a mask bitmap which are returned in the @pixmap_return
+and @mask_return arguments, respectively, and renders a pixbuf and its
+corresponding thresholded alpha mask to them. This is merely a convenience
+function; applications that need to render pixbufs with dither offsets or to
+given drawables should use gdk_draw_pixbuf() and gdk_pixbuf_render_threshold_alpha().
+
+The pixmap that is created is created for the colormap returned
+by gdk_rgb_get_colormap(). You normally will want to instead use
+the actual colormap for a widget, and use
+gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask_for_colormap().
+
+If the pixbuf does not have an alpha channel, then * mask_return will be set
+to %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixmap_return">
+<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created pixmap,
+or %NULL if the pixmap is not needed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask_return">
+<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created mask,
+or %NULL if the mask is not needed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="alpha_threshold">
+<parameter_description> Threshold value for opacity values.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an Xlib <type>Colormap</type>.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drawable_get_depth">
+<function name="gdk_offscreen_window_set_embedder">
<description>
-Obtains the bit depth of the drawable, that is, the number of bits
-that make up a pixel in the drawable's visual. Examples are 8 bits
-per pixel, 24 bits per pixel, etc.
-
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embedder">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkWindow that @window gets embedded in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> number of bits per pixel
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gdk_win32_drawable_finish">
@@ -11486,22 +11694,22 @@ gdk_window_show_unraised()).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_color_white">
+<function name="gdk_screen_get_font_options">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
+Gets any options previously set with gdk_screen_set_font_options().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> the location to store the color.
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
+<return> the current font options, or %NULL if no default
+font options have been set.
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -11722,6 +11930,33 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_get_cursor">
+<description>
+Retrieves a #GdkCursor pointer for the cursor currently set on the
+specified #GdkWindow, or %NULL. If the return value is %NULL then
+there is no custom cursor set on the specified window, and it is
+using the cursor for its parent window.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cursor">
+<parameter_description> a cursor
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkCursor, or %NULL. The returned object is owned
+by the #GdkWindow and should not be unreferenced directly. Use
+gdk_window_set_cursor() to unset the cursor of the window
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_text_height">
<description>
Determines the total height of a given string.
@@ -11900,36 +12135,27 @@ Queries whether a pixbuf has an alpha channel (opacity information).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_event_send_client_message_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_window_merge_child_input_shapes">
<description>
-On X11, sends an X ClientMessage event to a given window. On
-Windows, sends a message registered with the name
-GDK_WIN32_CLIENT_MESSAGE.
+Merges the input shape masks for any child windows into the
+input shape mask for @window. i.e. the union of all input masks
+for @window and its children will become the new input mask
+for @window. See gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask().
-This could be used for communicating between different
-applications, though the amount of data is limited to 20 bytes on
-X11, and to just four bytes on Windows.
+This function is distinct from gdk_window_set_child_input_shapes()
+because it includes @window's input shape mask in the set of
+shapes to be merged.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for the window where the message is to be sent.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkEvent to send, which should be a #GdkEventClient.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="winid">
-<parameter_description> the window to send the client message to.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> non-zero on success.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_region_destroy">
@@ -12139,8 +12365,8 @@ from inline data as in the below example.
<programlisting>
/<!-- -->* This data is in X bitmap format, and can be created with the 'bitmap'
utility. *<!-- -->/
-#define cursor1_width 16
-#define cursor1_height 16
+#define cursor1_width 16
+#define cursor1_height 16
static unsigned char cursor1_bits[] = {
0x80, 0x01, 0x40, 0x02, 0x20, 0x04, 0x10, 0x08, 0x08, 0x10, 0x04, 0x20,
0x82, 0x41, 0x41, 0x82, 0x41, 0x82, 0x82, 0x41, 0x04, 0x20, 0x08, 0x10,
@@ -12269,60 +12495,45 @@ It's deprecated for that reason.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_set_stipple">
+<function name="gdk_drop_reply">
<description>
-Sets the stipple for one render part (foreground, background, underline,
-etc.) Note that this is overwritten when iterating through the individual
-styled runs of a #PangoLayout or #PangoLayoutLine. This function is thus
-only useful when you call low level functions like pango_renderer_draw_glyphs()
-directly, or in the 'prepare_run' virtual function of a subclass of
-#GdkPangoRenderer.
+Accepts or rejects a drop.
-Since: 2.6
+This function is called by the drag destination in response
+to a drop initiated by the drag source.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gdk_renderer">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPangoRenderer
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="part">
-<parameter_description> the part to render with the stipple
+<parameter name="ok">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the drop is accepted.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stipple">
-<parameter_description> the new stipple value.
+<parameter name="time_">
+<parameter_description> the timestamp for this operation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_set_option">
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_scalable">
<description>
-Attaches a key/value pair as an option to a #GdkPixbuf. If %key already
-exists in the list of options attached to @pixbuf, the new value is
-ignored and %FALSE is returned.
-
+Return value: whether this image format is scalable.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success.
+<return> whether this image format is scalable.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -12440,42 +12651,6 @@ enable.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GdkDisplayManager">
-<description>
-The ::display_opened signal is emitted when a display is opened.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display_manager">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the opened display
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_event_get_time">
-<description>
-returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME. If @event is %NULL, returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
-Return value: time stamp field from @event
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> time stamp field from @event
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_keyval_to_unicode">
<description>
Convert from a GDK key symbol to the corresponding ISO10646 (Unicode)
@@ -12662,53 +12837,25 @@ display with the new pixbuf.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drawable_copy_to_image">
+<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_set_display">
<description>
-Copies a portion of @drawable into the client side image structure
- image If @image is %NULL, creates a new image of size @width x @height
-and copies into that. See gdk_drawable_get_image() for further details.
+Sets the display on which applications will be launched when
+using this context. See also gdk_app_launch_context_set_screen().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable, or %NULL if a new @image should be created.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_x">
-<parameter_description> x coordinate on @drawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_y">
-<parameter_description> y coordinate on @drawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description> x coordinate within @image. Must be 0 if @image is %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description> y coordinate within @image. Must be 0 if @image is %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of region to get
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkAppLaunchContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height or region to get
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @image, or a new a #GdkImage containing the contents
-of @drawable
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_new">
@@ -12749,38 +12896,27 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint">
+<function name="gdk_string_measure">
<description>
-This function is specific to the X11 backend of GDK, and indicates
-whether the window manager supports a certain hint from the
-Extended Window Manager Hints Specification. You can find this
-specification on
-<ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org">http://www.freedesktop.org</ulink>.
-
-When using this function, keep in mind that the window manager
-can change over time; so you shouldn't use this function in
-a way that impacts persistent application state. A common bug
-is that your application can start up before the window manager
-does when the user logs in, and before the window manager starts
-gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint() will return %FALSE for every property.
-You can monitor the window_manager_changed signal on #GdkScreen to detect
-a window manager change.
+Determines the distance from the origin to the rightmost
+portion of a nul-terminated string when drawn. This is not the
+correct value for determining the origin of the next
+portion when drawing text in multiple pieces.
+See gdk_string_width().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="property">
-<parameter_description> a property atom.
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the nul-terminated string to measure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window manager supports @property
-
-Since: 2.2
+<return> the right bearing of the string in pixels.
</return>
</function>
@@ -12918,10 +13054,10 @@ Since: 2.14
<function name="gdk_window_set_composited">
<description>
-Sets a #GdkWindow as composited, or unsets it. Composited
-windows do not automatically have their contents drawn to
-the screen. Drawing is redirected to an offscreen buffer
-and an expose event is emitted on the parent of the composited
+Sets a #GdkWindow as composited, or unsets it. Composited
+windows do not automatically have their contents drawn to
+the screen. Drawing is redirected to an offscreen buffer
+and an expose event is emitted on the parent of the composited
window. It is the responsibility of the parent's expose handler
to manually merge the off-screen content onto the screen in
whatever way it sees fit. See <xref linkend="composited-window-example"/>
@@ -12937,7 +13073,7 @@ invalidation on its parent. Draws done on the parent
window are also no longer clipped by the child.
This call is only supported on some systems (currently,
-only X11 with new enough Xcomposite and Xdamage extensions).
+only X11 with new enough Xcomposite and Xdamage extensions).
You must call gdk_display_supports_composite() to check if
setting a window as composited is supported before
attempting to do so.
@@ -12958,48 +13094,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_device_get_history">
-<description>
-Obtains the motion history for a device; given a starting and
-ending timestamp, return all events in the motion history for
-the device in the given range of time. Some windowing systems
-do not support motion history, in which case, %FALSE will
-be returned. (This is not distinguishable from the case where
-motion history is supported and no events were found.)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="device">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> the window with respect to which which the event coordinates will be reported
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> starting timestamp for range of events to return
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stop">
-<parameter_description> ending timestamp for the range of events to return
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="events">
-<parameter_description> location to store a newly-allocated array of #GdkTimeCoord, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_events">
-<parameter_description> location to store the length of @events, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the windowing system supports motion history and
-at least one event was found.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_gc_set_ts_origin">
<description>
Set the origin when using tiles or stipples with
@@ -13235,6 +13329,47 @@ not public API and must not be used by applications.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_colors_alloc">
+<description>
+Allocates colors from a colormap. This function
+is obsolete. See gdk_colormap_alloc_colors().
+For full documentation of the fields, see
+the Xlib documentation for <function>XAllocColorCells()</function>.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="contiguous">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the colors should be allocated
+in contiguous color cells.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="planes">
+<parameter_description> an array in which to store the plane masks.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="nplanes">
+<parameter_description> the number of planes to allocate. (Or zero,
+to indicate that the color allocation should not be planar.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixels">
+<parameter_description> an array into which to store allocated pixel values.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="npixels">
+<parameter_description> the number of pixels in each plane to allocate.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the allocation was successful
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GdkDisplay">
<description>
The ::closed signal is emitted when the connection to the windowing
@@ -13272,7 +13407,7 @@ For example in the X backend, a native window handle is an Xlib
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly-created #GdkWindow wrapper for the
+<return> the newly-created #GdkWindow wrapper for the
native window or %NULL if the window has been destroyed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -13499,6 +13634,29 @@ gdk_event_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_display_peek_event">
+<description>
+Gets a copy of the first #GdkEvent in the @display's event queue, without
+removing the event from the queue. (Note that this function will
+not get more events from the windowing system. It only checks the events
+that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.)
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a copy of the first #GdkEvent on the event queue, or %NULL
+if no events are in the queue. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with
+gdk_event_free().
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_pixbuf_composite_color_simple">
<description>
Creates a new #GdkPixbuf by scaling @src to @dest_width x
@@ -13870,6 +14028,36 @@ should be drawn)
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_option">
+<description>
+Looks up @key in the list of options that may have been attached to the
+ pixbuf when it was loaded, or that may have been attached by another
+function using gdk_pixbuf_set_option().
+
+For instance, the ANI loader provides "Title" and "Artist" options.
+The ICO, XBM, and XPM loaders provide "x_hot" and "y_hot" hot-spot
+options for cursor definitions. The PNG loader provides the tEXt ancillary
+chunk key/value pairs as options. Since 2.12, the TIFF and JPEG loaders
+return an "orientation" option string that corresponds to the embedded
+TIFF/Exif orientation tag (if present).
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the value associated with @key. This is a nul-terminated
+string that should not be freed or %NULL if @key was not found.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_region_union_with_rect">
<description>
Sets the area of @region to the union of the areas of @region and
@@ -13953,14 +14141,14 @@ symbol is shifted, so when comparing a key press to a
be masked out.
</para>
<informalexample><programlisting>
-// We want to ignore irrelevant modifiers like ScrollLock.
-#define ALL_ACCELS_MASK (GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK)
+/* We want to ignore irrelevant modifiers like ScrollLock */
+#define ALL_ACCELS_MASK (GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK)
gdk_keymap_translate_keyboard_state (keymap, event->hardware_keycode,
event->state, event->group,
&keyval, NULL, NULL, &consumed);
if (keyval == GDK_PLUS &&
(event->state & ~consumed & ALL_ACCELS_MASK) == GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
-// Control was pressed
+/* Control was pressed */
</programlisting></informalexample>
<para>
An older interpretation @consumed_modifiers was that it contained
@@ -13968,10 +14156,10 @@ all modifiers that might affect the translation of the key;
this allowed accelerators to be stored with irrelevant consumed
modifiers, by doing:</para>
<informalexample><programlisting>
-// XXX Don't do this XXX
+/* XXX Don't do this XXX */
if (keyval == accel_keyval &&
(event->state & ~consumed & ALL_ACCELS_MASK) == (accel_mods & ~consumed))
-//Accelerator was pressed
+/* Accelerator was pressed */
</programlisting></informalexample>
<para>
However, this did not work if multi-modifier combinations were
@@ -14028,19 +14216,15 @@ determine the group or level, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_region_copy">
+<function name="gdk_drag_context_new">
<description>
-Copies @region, creating an identical new region.
+Creates a new #GdkDragContext.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="region">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new region identical to @region
+<return> the newly created #GdkDragContext.
</return>
</function>
@@ -14357,6 +14541,23 @@ and the new value in the remaining fields.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="_gdk_drawable_get_subwindow_scratch_gc">
+<description>
+Return value: A #GdkGC suitable for drawing on @drawable
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkDrawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GdkGC suitable for drawing on @drawable
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_get_children">
<description>
Gets the list of children of @window known to GDK.
@@ -14575,7 +14776,7 @@ Since: 2.2
<function name="gdk_window_get_pointer">
<description>
Obtains the current pointer position and modifier state.
-The position is given in coordinates relative to the upper left
+The position is given in coordinates relative to the upper left
corner of @window.
@@ -14866,6 +15067,10 @@ Determines the width of a given string.
<description>
Gets the toplevel window that's an ancestor of @window.
+Any window type but %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD is considered a
+toplevel window, as is a %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD window that
+has a root window as parent.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14893,6 +15098,32 @@ cairo surface) when its size has changed.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new, empty animation.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the animation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the animation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rate">
+<parameter_description> the speed of the animation, in frames per second
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly allocated #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
+
+Since: 2.8
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_display_get_window_at_pointer">
<description>
Obtains the window underneath the mouse pointer, returning the location
@@ -15115,24 +15346,37 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_gc_set_stipple">
+<function name="gdk_colormap_alloc_color">
<description>
-Set the stipple bitmap for a graphics context. The
-stipple will only be used if the fill mode is
-%GDK_STIPPLED or %GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED.
+Allocates a single color from a colormap.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stipple">
-<parameter_description> the new stipple bitmap.
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the color to allocate. On return the
+<structfield>pixel</structfield> field will be
+filled in if allocation succeeds.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="writeable">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, the color is allocated writeable
+(their values can later be changed using gdk_color_change()).
+Writeable colors cannot be shared between applications.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="best_match">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, GDK will attempt to do matching against
+existing colors if the color cannot be allocated as requested.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_set_timestamp">
@@ -15318,24 +15562,24 @@ in X ClientMessage events.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_region_equal">
+<function name="gdk_window_focus">
<description>
-Finds out if the two regions are the same.
+Sets keyboard focus to @window. In most cases, gtk_window_present()
+should be used on a #GtkWindow, rather than calling this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="region1">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="region2">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
+<parameter name="timestamp">
+<parameter_description> timestamp of the event triggering the window focus
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @region1 and @region2 are equal.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_fullscreen">
@@ -15393,6 +15637,37 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_screen_get_rgba_colormap">
+<description>
+Gets a colormap to use for creating windows or pixmaps with an
+alpha channel. The windowing system on which GTK+ is running
+may not support this capability, in which case %NULL will
+be returned. Even if a non-%NULL value is returned, its
+possible that the window's alpha channel won't be honored
+when displaying the window on the screen: in particular, for
+X an appropriate windowing manager and compositing manager
+must be running to provide appropriate display.
+
+This functionality is not implemented in the Windows backend.
+
+For setting an overall opacity for a top-level window, see
+gdk_window_set_opacity().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a colormap to use for windows with an alpha channel
+or %NULL if the capability is not available.
+
+Since: 2.8
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_event_request_motions">
<description>
Request more motion notifies if @event is a motion notify hint event.
@@ -15424,47 +15699,62 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_scalable">
+<function name="gdk_threads_set_lock_functions">
<description>
-Return value: whether this image format is scalable.
+Allows the application to replace the standard method that
+GDK uses to protect its data structures. Normally, GDK
+creates a single #GMutex that is locked by gdk_threads_enter(),
+and released by gdk_threads_leave(); using this function an
+application provides, instead, a function @enter_fn that is
+called by gdk_threads_enter() and a function @leave_fn that is
+called by gdk_threads_leave().
+
+The functions must provide at least same locking functionality
+as the default implementation, but can also do extra application
+specific processing.
+
+As an example, consider an application that has its own recursive
+lock that when held, holds the GTK+ lock as well. When GTK+ unlocks
+the GTK+ lock when entering a recursive main loop, the application
+must temporarily release its lock as well.
+
+Most threaded GTK+ apps won't need to use this method.
+
+This method must be called before gdk_threads_init(), and cannot
+be called multiple times.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+<parameter name="enter_fn">
+<parameter_description> function called to guard GDK
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="leave_fn">
+<parameter_description> function called to release the guard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether this image format is scalable.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drag_get_protocol_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_image_get_colormap">
<description>
-Finds out the DND protocol supported by a window.
+Retrieves the colormap for a given image, if it exists. An image
+will have a colormap if the drawable from which it was created has
+a colormap, or if a colormap was set explicitely with
+gdk_image_set_colormap().
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay where the destination window resides
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xid">
-<parameter_description> the windowing system id of the destination window.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="protocol">
-<parameter_description> location where the supported DND protocol is returned.
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the windowing system id of the window where the drop should happen. This
-may be @xid or the id of a proxy window, or zero if @xid doesn't
-support Drag and Drop.
+<return> colormap for the image
</return>
</function>
@@ -15513,25 +15803,80 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_list_visuals">
+<function name="gdk_cursor_new_for_display">
<description>
-Lists the available visuals for the specified @screen.
-A visual describes a hardware image data format.
-For example, a visual might support 24-bit color, or 8-bit color,
-and might expect pixels to be in a certain format.
-
-Call g_list_free() on the return value when you're finished with it.
+Creates a new cursor from the set of builtin cursors.
+Some useful ones are:
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_ptr.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_PTR (right-facing arrow)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="crosshair.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_CROSSHAIR (crosshair)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="xterm.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_XTERM (I-beam)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="watch.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_WATCH (busy)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="fleur.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_FLEUR (for moving objects)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand1.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND1 (a right-pointing hand)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand2.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND2 (a left-pointing hand)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="left_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_LEFT_SIDE (resize left side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_SIDE (resize right side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_LEFT_CORNER (resize northwest corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_RIGHT_CORNER (resize northeast corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_LEFT_CORNER (resize southwest corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER (resize southeast corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_SIDE (resize top side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_SIDE (resize bottom side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_h_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW (move vertical splitter)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_v_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW (move horizontal splitter)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+#GDK_BLANK_CURSOR (Blank cursor). Since 2.16
+</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for which the cursor will be created
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cursor_type">
+<parameter_description> cursor to create
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a list of visuals; the list must be freed, but not its
-contents
+<return> a new #GdkCursor
Since: 2.2
</return>
@@ -15631,41 +15976,20 @@ the same as the current keyboard state.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_gc_update_context">
+<function name="gdk_drawable_get_visual">
<description>
-Set the attributes of a cairo context to match those of a #GdkGC
-as far as possible. Some aspects of a #GdkGC, such as clip masks
-and functions other than %GDK_COPY are not currently handled.
+Gets the #GdkVisual describing the pixel format of @drawable.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cr">
-<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="override_foreground">
-<parameter_description> a foreground color to use to override the
-foreground color of the GC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="override_stipple">
-<parameter_description> a stipple pattern to use to override the
-stipple from the GC. If this is present and the fill mode
-of the GC isn't %GDK_STIPPLED or %GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED
-the fill mode will be forced to %GDK_STIPPLED
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gc_changed">
-<parameter_description> pass %FALSE if the @gc has not changed since the
-last call to this function
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GdkVisual
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_bits_per_sample">
@@ -15937,24 +16261,22 @@ Gets the metrics of a string of wide characters.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_set_drawable">
+<function name="gdk_colormap_get_screen">
<description>
-Sets the drawable the renderer draws to.
+Gets the screen for which this colormap was created.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gdk_renderer">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPangoRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> the new target drawable, or %NULL
+<parameter name="cmap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the screen for which this colormap was created.
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_set_urgency_hint">
@@ -16008,6 +16330,36 @@ non-interchangeable kind of window.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_threads_add_timeout">
+<description>
+A wrapper for the common usage of gdk_threads_add_timeout_full()
+assigning the default priority, #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT.
+
+See gdk_threads_add_timeout_full().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="interval">
+<parameter_description> the time between calls to the function, in milliseconds
+(1/1000ths of a second)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="function">
+<parameter_description> function to call
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @function
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_pixdata_to_csource">
<description>
Generates C source code suitable for compiling images directly
@@ -16224,29 +16576,35 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_draw_lines">
+<function name="gdk_draw_layout_line">
<description>
-Draws a series of lines connecting the given points.
-The way in which joins between lines are draw is determined by the
-#GdkCapStyle value in the #GdkGC. This can be set with
-gdk_gc_set_line_attributes().
+Render a #PangoLayoutLine onto an GDK drawable
+
+If the layout's #PangoContext has a transformation matrix set, then
+ x and @y specify the position of the left edge of the baseline
+(left is in before-tranform user coordinates) in after-transform
+device coordinates.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable (a #GdkWindow or a #GdkPixmap).
+<parameter_description> the drawable on which to draw the line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
+<parameter_description> base graphics to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="points">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint structures specifying the endpoints of the
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position of start of string (in pixels)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_points">
-<parameter_description> the size of the @points array.
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position of baseline (in pixels)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="line">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoLayoutLine
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -16311,25 +16669,53 @@ gdk_color_copy().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_end_paint">
+<function name="gdk_drawable_copy_to_image">
<description>
-Indicates that the backing store created by the most recent call to
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() should be copied onscreen and
-deleted, leaving the next-most-recent backing store or no backing
-store at all as the active paint region. See
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() for full details. It is an error to
-call this function without a matching
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() first.
+Copies a portion of @drawable into the client side image structure
+ image If @image is %NULL, creates a new image of size @width x @height
+and copies into that. See gdk_drawable_get_image() for further details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable, or %NULL if a new @image should be created.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="src_x">
+<parameter_description> x coordinate on @drawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="src_y">
+<parameter_description> y coordinate on @drawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_x">
+<parameter_description> x coordinate within @image. Must be 0 if @image is %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_y">
+<parameter_description> y coordinate within @image. Must be 0 if @image is %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of region to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height or region to get
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> @image, or a new a #GdkImage containing the contents
+of @drawable
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_gc_set_dashes">
@@ -16559,11 +16945,11 @@ structure. The color is <emphasis>not</emphasis> allocated, you
must call gdk_colormap_alloc_color() yourself. The string can
either one of a large set of standard names. (Taken from the X11
<filename>rgb.txt</filename> file), or it can be a hex value in the
-form '#rgb' '#rrggbb' '#rrrgggbbb' or
-'#rrrrggggbbbb' where 'r', 'g' and 'b' are hex digits of the
+form '#rgb' '#rrggbb' '#rrrgggbbb' or
+'#rrrrggggbbbb' where 'r', 'g' and 'b' are hex digits of the
red, green, and blue components of the color, respectively. (White
-in the four forms is '#fff' '#ffffff' '#fffffffff' and
-'#ffffffffffff')
+in the four forms is '#fff' '#ffffff' '#fffffffff' and
+'#ffffffffffff')
</description>
@@ -16751,6 +17137,23 @@ convenient.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_set_child_shapes">
+<description>
+Sets the shape mask of @window to the union of shape masks
+for all children of @window, ignoring the shape mask of @window
+itself. Contrast with gdk_window_merge_child_shapes() which includes
+the shape mask of @window in the masks to be merged.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_bufferv">
<description>
Saves pixbuf to a new buffer in format @type, which is currently "jpeg",
@@ -16831,25 +17234,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_image_get_colormap">
-<description>
-Retrieves the colormap for a given image, if it exists. An image
-will have a colormap if the drawable from which it was created has
-a colormap, or if a colormap was set explicitely with
-gdk_image_set_colormap().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> colormap for the image
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_get_default">
<description>
Gets the default #PangoRenderer for a screen. This default renderer
@@ -16877,15 +17261,19 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drag_context_new">
+<function name="gdk_region_copy">
<description>
-Creates a new #GdkDragContext.
+Copies @region, creating an identical new region.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="region">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly created #GdkDragContext.
+<return> a new region identical to @region
</return>
</function>
@@ -16933,33 +17321,18 @@ for some windowing systems.)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_threads_add_timeout">
+<function name="gdk_screen_get_default">
<description>
-A wrapper for the common usage of gdk_threads_add_timeout_full()
-assigning the default priority, #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT.
-
-See gdk_threads_add_timeout_full().
+Gets the default screen for the default display. (See
+gdk_display_get_default ()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="interval">
-<parameter_description> the time between calls to the function, in milliseconds
-(1/1000ths of a second)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="function">
-<parameter_description> function to call
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @function
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+<return> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if there is no default display.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
diff --git a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
index 5b074d6..914eaab 100644
--- a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
+++ b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
@@ -14,51 +14,41 @@ Return value: whether or not to let the user search interactively
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
<description>
-Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
-See gtk_status_icon_new_from_file() for details.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Return value: the paper height.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> a filename
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper height.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_has_frame">
<description>
-Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the row at @path.
-See also gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
-See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_has_frame().
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether the entry has a beveled frame
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_has_icon">
@@ -174,27 +164,18 @@ will be ignored.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkPrintOperationPreview">
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_base_folder">
<description>
-The ::got-page-size signal is emitted once for each page
-that gets rendered to the preview.
-
-A handler for this signal should update the @context
-according to @page_setup and set up a suitable cairo
-context, using gtk_print_context_set_cairo_context().
+Sets the folder with respect to which completions occur.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="preview">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> the current #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="chooser_entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_setup">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkPageSetup for the current page
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> file for a folder in the chooser entries current file system.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -221,36 +202,30 @@ boundary algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_has_frame">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_has_frame().
+Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the row at @path.
+See also gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
+See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether the entry has a beveled frame
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
-<description>
-Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @icon_set.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic">
@@ -305,6 +280,47 @@ string used by the label, and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_uri">
+<description>
+Sets the file referred to by @uri as the current file for the file chooser,
+by changing to the URI's parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
+list. If the @chooser is #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the URI's base
+name will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
+
+If the URI isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder
+of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @uri. This is equivalent
+to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
+gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
+
+Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
+directory change.
+If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
+you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
+user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
+does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
+a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
+file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+]|
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI to set as current
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the URI was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_draw_slider">
<description>
Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
@@ -722,40 +738,40 @@ passing 0 for @width and @height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
+<function name="GtkCellRendererCombo">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
-given parameters.
+This signal is emitted each time after the user selected an item in
+the combo box, either by using the mouse or the arrow keys. Contrary
+to GtkComboBox, GtkCellRendererCombo::changed is not emitted for
+changes made to a selected item in the entry. The argument @new_iter
+corresponds to the newly selected item in the combo box and it is relative
+to the GtkTreeModel set via the model property on GtkCellRendererCombo.
+Note that as soon as you change the model displayed in the tree view,
+the tree view will immediately cease the editing operating. This
+means that you most probably want to refrain from changing the model
+until the combo cell renderer emits the edited or editing_canceled signal.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the paper name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display_name">
-<parameter_description> the human-readable name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the paper width, in units of @unit
+<parameter name="combo">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the paper height, in units of @unit
+<parameter name="path_string">
+<parameter_description> a string of the path identifying the edited cell
+(relative to the tree view model)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
+<parameter name="new_iter">
+<parameter_description> the new iter selected in the combo box
+(relative to the combo box model)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
-to free it
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_set_mark">
@@ -861,6 +877,27 @@ Creates a new #GtkAccelGroup.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_notebook_remove_page">
+<description>
+Removes a page from the notebook given its index
+in the notebook.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> the index of a notebook page, starting
+from 0. If -1, the last page will
+be removed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_scale_set_draw_value">
<description>
Specifies whether the current value is displayed as a string next
@@ -931,18 +968,19 @@ Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_base_folder">
+<function name="_gtk_window_set_has_toplevel_focus">
<description>
-Sets the folder with respect to which completions occur.
+Internal function that sets whether the keyboard focus for the
+toplevel window (taking into account inter-process embedding.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> file for a folder in the chooser entries current file system.
+<parameter name="has_toplevel_focus">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -951,11 +989,13 @@ Sets the folder with respect to which completions occur.
<function name="GtkMountOperation">
<description>
-#GtkMountOperation is an implementation of #GMountOperation that
+#GtkMountOperation is an implementation of #GMountOperation that
can be used with GIO functions for mounting volumes such as
-g_file_mount_enclosing_volume() or g_file_mount_mountable().
+g_file_mount_enclosing_volume(), g_file_mount_mountable(),
+g_volume_mount(), g_mount_unmount() and others.
-When necessary, #GtkMountOperation shows dialogs to ask for passwords.
+When necessary, #GtkMountOperation shows dialogs to ask for
+passwords, questions or show processes blocking unmount.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1030,30 +1070,59 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_file">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_select_range">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
-See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
+This function moves the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks
+simultaneously. If you move them in two steps
+with gtk_text_buffer_move_mark(), you will temporarily select a
+region in between their old and new locations, which can be pretty
+inefficient since the temporarily-selected region will force stuff
+to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can
+be optimized.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> the filename to read the page setup from
+<parameter name="ins">
+<parameter_description> where to put the "insert" mark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="bound">
+<parameter_description> where to put the "selection_bound" mark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.14
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_item">
+<description>
+Obtains the menu item which corresponds to @path.
+
+If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
+submenu, then the item is returned. If you are interested in the submenu,
+use gtk_item_factory_get_widget() instead.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the path to the menu item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
+lead to a menu item
</return>
</function>
@@ -1076,6 +1145,17 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem with an empty label.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_chain">
<description>
Retrieves the focus chain of the container, if one has been
@@ -1223,25 +1303,24 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_sensitive">
<description>
-Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
-"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
+Sets the cell renderer's sensitivity.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="sensitive">
+<parameter_description> the sensitivity of the cell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
@@ -1284,33 +1363,32 @@ Return value: A current path, or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert">
<description>
-Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window
-(see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window()).
-
-Since: 2.12
+Inserts @len bytes of @text at position @iter. If @len is -1,
+ text must be nul-terminated and will be inserted in its
+entirety. Emits the "insert-text" signal; insertion actually occurs
+in the default handler for the signal. @iter is invalidated when
+insertion occurs (because the buffer contents change), but the
+default signal handler revalidates it to point to the end of the
+inserted text.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to the widget
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to the widget
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a position in the buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="bx">
-<parameter_description> return location for bin_window X coordinate
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> UTF-8 format text to insert
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="by">
-<parameter_description> return location for bin_window Y coordinate
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> length of text in bytes, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -1351,6 +1429,68 @@ Gets the line wrapping for the view.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup">
+<description>
+Creates a new message dialog, which is a simple dialog with an icon
+indicating the dialog type (error, warning, etc.) and some text which
+is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+When the user clicks a button a "response" signal is emitted with
+response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See #GtkDialog for more details.
+
+Special XML characters in the printf() arguments passed to this
+function will automatically be escaped as necessary.
+(See g_markup_printf_escaped() for how this is implemented.)
+Usually this is what you want, but if you have an existing
+Pango markup string that you want to use literally as the
+label, then you need to use gtk_message_dialog_set_markup()
+instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
+as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
+argument.
+|[
+GtkWidget *dialog;
+dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (main_application_window,
+GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
+GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
+GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
+NULL);
+gtk_message_dialog_set_markup (GTK_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
+markup);
+]|
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> type of message
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buttons">
+<parameter_description> set of buttons to use
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkMessageDialog
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_mnemonic_activate">
<description>
Activates the targets associated with the mnemonic.
@@ -1406,26 +1546,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_selection_clipboard">
-<description>
-Removes a #GtkClipboard added with
-gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard added to @buffer by
-gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard()
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_draw_vline">
<description>
Draws a vertical line from (@x, @y1_) to (@x, @y2_) in @window
@@ -1701,6 +1821,23 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
+<description>
+Return value: Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paper_size_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object by parsing a
@@ -1783,36 +1920,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_targets">
-<description>
-Requests the contents of the clipboard as list of supported targets.
-When the list is later received, @callback will be called.
-
-The @targets parameter to @callback will contain the resulting targets if
-the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when the targets are received,
-or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
-one way or the other.)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_draw_box">
<description>
Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
@@ -2039,6 +2146,26 @@ gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_get_file_system">
+<description>
+Gets the #GtkFileSystem of @chooser; this is an internal
+implementation detail, used for conversion between paths
+and filenames and URIs.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the file system for @chooser.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_numbers">
<description>
Whether to show recently used resources prepended by a unique number.
@@ -2093,22 +2220,23 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_target">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
<description>
-Retrieves the target of the selection.
+Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_opacity">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the target of the selection.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_unmap">
@@ -2144,26 +2272,20 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_pixmap">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_number_up">
<description>
-Gets the pixmap and mask being displayed by the #GtkImage.
-The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_PIXMAP (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned pixmap and mask.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap">
-<parameter_description> location to store the pixmap, or %NULL
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> location to store the mask, or %NULL
+<parameter name="number_up">
+<parameter_description> the number of pages per sheet
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2289,21 +2411,41 @@ know that the model emitted the "row_deleted" signal.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_is_virtual">
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add_signal">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer is virtual
+Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
+ binding_set When the binding is activated, @signal_name will be
+emitted on the target widget, with @n_args @Varargs used as
+arguments.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to install an entry for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to install
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to install
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="signal_name">
+<parameter_description> signal to execute upon activation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_args">
+<parameter_description> number of arguments to @signal_name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer is virtual
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_search">
@@ -2367,22 +2509,27 @@ and then reread all previously read RC files.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_list_all_types">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_show_arrow">
<description>
-Return the type ids that have been registered after
-calling gtk_test_register_all_types().
+Sets whether to show an overflow menu when
+ toolbar doesn't have room for all items on it. If %TRUE,
+items that there are not room are available through an
+overflow menu.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="n_types">
-<parameter_description> location to store number of types
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_arrow">
+<parameter_description> Whether to show an overflow menu
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> 0-terminated array of type ids
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_func">
@@ -2481,21 +2628,27 @@ be added to the returned colormap; it should not be unreferenced.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_show_fill_level">
+<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
+Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
+If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
+accelerator called a mnemonic.
+Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the label with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
+<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -2608,20 +2761,21 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_left_margin">
+<function name="gtk_menu_get_accel_path">
<description>
-Gets the default left margin size of paragraphs in the @text_view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+Retrieves the accelerator path set on the menu.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenu
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> left margin in pixels
+<return> the accelerator path set on the menu.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -2650,50 +2804,20 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_geometry">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_completion">
<description>
-Obtains information about the location of the status icon
-on screen. This information can be used to e.g. position
-popups like notification bubbles.
-
-See gtk_status_icon_position_menu() for a more convenient
-alternative for positioning menus.
-
-Note that some platforms do not allow GTK+ to provide
-this information, and even on platforms that do allow it,
-the information is not reliable unless the status icon
-is embedded in a notification area, see
-gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
-
+Return value: The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> return location for the screen, or %NULL if the
-information is not needed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> return location for the area occupied by the status
-icon, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> return location for the orientation of the panel
-in which the status icon is embedded, or %NULL. A panel
-at the top or bottom of the screen is horizontal, a panel
-at the left or right is vertical.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the location information has
-been filled in
+<return> The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -2714,48 +2838,19 @@ used.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_activatable">
-<description>
-Sets whether the icon is activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the icon should be activatable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
<description>
-Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_icon_list">
@@ -2884,6 +2979,31 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset">
+<description>
+This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
+format with the passed @buffer. See
+gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tagset_name">
+<parameter_description> an optional tagset name, on %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
+format's mime-type.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sizing">
<description>
Sets the growth behavior of @tree_column to @type.
@@ -3173,15 +3293,29 @@ dragging the header.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_sensitive">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem with an empty label.
+Sets the sensitivity for the specified icon.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sensitive">
+<parameter_description> Specifies whether the icon should appear
+sensitive or insensitive
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_submenu">
@@ -3201,6 +3335,23 @@ gtk_menu_item_set_submenu().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_n_pages_to_print">
+<description>
+Returns: the number of pages that will be printed
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the number of pages that will be printed
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_show_hidden">
<description>
Sets whether hidden files should be included in the #GtkTreeModel
@@ -3328,26 +3479,22 @@ Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index">
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
<description>
-Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
-by gtk_entry_get_text()) to a position in the
-entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
-with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
+See gtk_range_get_adjustment() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout_index">
-<parameter_description> byte index into the entry layout text
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> byte index into the entry contents
+<return> the adjustment associated with the scale
+
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -3485,25 +3632,20 @@ character position 0) to the end iterator.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_tree_lines">
+<function name="gtk_vscrollbar_new">
<description>
-Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @tree_view.
-This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Creates a new vertical scrollbar.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enabled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable tree line drawing, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkVScrollbar
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_invisible_new_for_screen">
@@ -3546,54 +3688,43 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_window">
<description>
-Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
-to widget relative coordinates.
+Determines whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
+gtk_widget_set_has_window().
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bx">
-<parameter_description> bin_window X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="by">
-<parameter_description> bin_window Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> return location for widget X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> return location for widget Y coordinate
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_format">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_child_visible">
<description>
-Retrieves the format of the selection.
+Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
+If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
+needs reorganization.
+
+This function is only useful for container implementations and
+never should be called by an application.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the format of the selection.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
</return>
</function>
@@ -3710,38 +3841,20 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
<description>
-Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
-is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
-unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
-scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
-gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
-
-The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
-the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
-This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
-for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
-the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
-widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
-#GtkViewport proxy.
+Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
-A widget supports scrolling natively if the
-set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
-i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> @icon_set.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_mime_type">
@@ -3796,41 +3909,52 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_select_all">
+<function name="gtk_button_get_use_underline">
<description>
-Selects all the icons. @icon_view must has its selection mode set
-to #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Return value: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the button label
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if an embedded underline in the button label
+indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_text">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
<description>
-Retrieves the text displayed superimposed on the progress bar,
-if any, otherwise %NULL. The return value is a reference
-to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid
-if you change the text in the progress bar.
-
+Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
+signal will be emitted if any lines are validated.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> iter pointing into a line that will be used as the
+coordinate origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y0_">
+<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
+which to begin validation. (The offset here is in pixels
+after validation.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y1_">
+<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
+which to end validation. (The offset here is in pixels
+after validation.)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> text, or %NULL; this string is owned by the widget
-and should not be modified or freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset">
@@ -3911,45 +4035,25 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_value_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license">
<description>
-This function demarshals a value from a string. This function
-calls g_value_init() on the @value argument, so it need not be
-initialised beforehand.
-
-This function can handle char, uchar, boolean, int, uint, long,
-ulong, enum, flags, float, double, string, #GdkColor and
-#GtkAdjustment type values. Support for #GtkWidget type values is
-still to come.
+Sets whether the license text in @about is
+automatically wrapped.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pspec">
-<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the property
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string representation of the value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the #GValue to store the result in
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="wrap_license">
+<parameter_description> whether to wrap the license
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="GtkAdjustment">
@@ -3987,6 +4091,24 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_length">
+<description>
+Retrieves the length of the raw data of the selection.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the length of the data of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_get_type_hint">
<description>
Gets the type hint for this window. See gtk_window_set_type_hint().
@@ -4003,40 +4125,40 @@ Gets the type hint for this window. See gtk_window_set_type_hint().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRendererCombo">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
<description>
-This signal is emitted each time after the user selected an item in
-the combo box, either by using the mouse or the arrow keys. Contrary
-to GtkComboBox, GtkCellRendererCombo::changed is not emitted for
-changes made to a selected item in the entry. The argument @new_iter
-corresponds to the newly selected item in the combo box and it is relative
-to the GtkTreeModel set via the model property on GtkCellRendererCombo.
-
-Note that as soon as you change the model displayed in the tree view,
-the tree view will immediately cease the editing operating. This
-means that you most probably want to refrain from changing the model
-until the combo cell renderer emits the edited or editing_canceled signal.
+Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
+given parameters.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the paper name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_string">
-<parameter_description> a string of the path identifying the edited cell
-(relative to the tree view model)
+<parameter name="display_name">
+<parameter_description> the human-readable name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_iter">
-<parameter_description> the new iter selected in the combo box
-(relative to the combo box model)
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the paper width, in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the paper height, in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
+to free it
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_is_embedded">
@@ -4168,22 +4290,22 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_plug_add_to_socket">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution">
<description>
-Adds a plug to a socket within the same application.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the resolution in dpi
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_slice">
@@ -4218,6 +4340,12 @@ Return value: an allocated UTF-8 string
Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
@entry. See gtk_entry_set_max_length().
+This is equivalent to:
+
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gtk_entry_buffer_get_max_length (gtk_entry_get_buffer (entry));
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4385,31 +4513,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_sensitive">
-<description>
-Sets the sensitivity for the specified icon.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sensitive">
-<parameter_description> Specifies whether the icon should appear
-sensitive or insensitive
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_popup_set_width">
<description>
Sets whether the completion popup window will be resized to be the same
@@ -4494,20 +4597,19 @@ copy the array.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_palette">
<description>
-Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of @has_palette.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> a title for the menu in tearoff mode
+<parameter name="has_palette">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if palette is to be visible, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4559,62 +4661,66 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_focus">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new">
<description>
-Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle on @window using the
-given style.
+Creates a new #GtkFileChooserDialog. This function is analogous to
+gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons().
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_focus() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> Open or save mode for the dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="first_button_text">
+<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> response ID for the first button, then additional (button, id) pairs, ending with %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
+<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
<description>
-Registers @alias as another name for @target.
-So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
-will return @target.
+Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
+to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
+activates that accelerator.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="alias">
-<parameter_description> an alias for @target
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
+to activate the accelerator.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> an existing icon size
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_unit">
@@ -4639,91 +4745,46 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_attributes">
<description>
-Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
-for the scrolled window.
-
-The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
-in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
-Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
-%GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and %GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.
+Sets a #PangoAttrList; the attributes in the list are applied to the
+label text.
-See also gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement() and
-gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
+<note><para>The attributes set with this function will be applied
+and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way
+of the #GtkLabel:use-underline or #GtkLabel:use-markup properties.
+While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set
+attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied
+to the label after the markup string is parsed.</para></note>
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window_placement">
-<parameter_description> position of the child window
+<parameter name="attrs">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_slider">
+<function name="gtk_get_event_widget">
<description>
-Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
-given style and orientation.
+If @event is %NULL or the event was not associated with any widget,
+Return value: the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> a shadow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_get_default_files">
@@ -4788,35 +4849,31 @@ using this temporary row, call _gtk_file_system_model_remove_editable().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_set_valist">
<description>
-Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file.
-
+Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
-"Print Settings"
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter name="var_args">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
+with @first_prop_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos">
@@ -5021,17 +5078,48 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_thaw">
+<function name="gtk_draw_handle">
<description>
-Does nothing. Previously defrosted a calendar; all the changes made
-since the last gtk_calendar_freeze() were displayed.
+Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
-Deprecated: 2.8:
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_handle() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> with of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the orientation of the handle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -5119,30 +5207,51 @@ Non vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_check_version">
<description>
-Parses a file containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
-UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
+Checks that the GTK+ library in use is compatible with the
+given version. Generally you would pass in the constants
+#GTK_MAJOR_VERSION, #GTK_MINOR_VERSION, #GTK_MICRO_VERSION
+as the three arguments to this function; that produces
+a check that the library in use is compatible with
+the version of GTK+ the application or module was compiled
+against.
+
+Compatibility is defined by two things: first the version
+of the running library is newer than the version
+ required_major required_minor @required_micro. Second
+the running library must be binary compatible with the
+version @required_major required_minor required_micro
+(same major version.)
+
+This function is primarily for GTK+ modules; the module
+can call this function to check that it wasn't loaded
+into an incompatible version of GTK+. However, such a
+a check isn't completely reliable, since the module may be
+linked against an old version of GTK+ and calling the
+old version of gtk_check_version(), but still get loaded
+into an application using a newer version of GTK+.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+<parameter name="required_major">
+<parameter_description> the required major version.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the name of the file to parse
+<parameter name="required_minor">
+<parameter_description> the required minor version.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="required_micro">
+<parameter_description> the required micro version.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> %NULL if the GTK+ library is compatible with the
+given version, or a string describing the version mismatch.
+The returned string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified
+or freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -5163,28 +5272,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
<description>
-Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
-for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
+Creates a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> of the merged UI.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the tab label widget to use, or %NULL for default tab
-label.
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of
+the merged UI.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="GtkAboutDialog">
@@ -5204,6 +5308,12 @@ Since: 2.8
Retrieves the current length of the text in
@entry.
+This is equivalent to:
+
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gtk_entry_buffer_get_length (gtk_entry_get_buffer (entry));
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5303,22 +5413,20 @@ children, emitting #GtkWidget::screen-changed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_set">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_selection_clipboard">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_icon_set() for details.
+Removes a #GtkClipboard added with
+gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon size
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard added to @buffer by
+gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard()
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -5386,25 +5494,6 @@ and position to their child widgets.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_window_set_has_toplevel_focus">
-<description>
-Internal function that sets whether the keyboard focus for the
-toplevel window (taking into account inter-process embedding.)
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_toplevel_focus">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_with_valuesv">
<description>
A variant of gtk_list_store_insert_with_values() which
@@ -5558,30 +5647,36 @@ moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_key_file">
<description>
-This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
-The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
-reused for future invocations of this function.
+Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+to use the default name "Page Setup"
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_send_expose">
@@ -5614,29 +5709,27 @@ the event was handled)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
+<function name="gtk_button_set_image">
<description>
-Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
-in a RC file.
-
-Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
-order to support symbolic colors.
+Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
+it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
+image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
+gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> a #GScanner
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
-that was expected but not found
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_grid_lines">
@@ -5657,22 +5750,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate">
-<description>
-Reenable activation signals from the action
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_set_tooltip">
<description>
Sets the tooltip text on @action
@@ -5712,6 +5789,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_handle_position">
+<description>
+Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
+gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="handle_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current handle position.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_after">
<description>
Inserts a new row after @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will be
@@ -5878,36 +5972,23 @@ GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);</literal> will create a new #GtkTreeStore with three col
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ruler_get_range">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
<description>
-Retrieves values indicating the range and current position of a #GtkRuler.
-See gtk_ruler_set_range().
+If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
+gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner(), and the gtk_clipboard_set_with_data() or
+gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
+by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ruler">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="lower">
-<parameter_description> location to store lower limit of the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="upper">
-<parameter_description> location to store upper limit of the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> location to store the current position of the mark on the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_size">
-<parameter_description> location to store the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating
-the space to leave for the text, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the owner of the clipboard, if any; otherwise %NULL.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_begin_move_drag">
@@ -5959,7 +6040,8 @@ gtk_tree_path_free(). If @column is non-%NULL, then it will be filled
with the column at that point. @cell_x and @cell_y return the coordinates
relative to the cell background (i.e. the @background_area passed to
gtk_cell_renderer_render()). This function is only meaningful if
- tree_view is realized.
+ tree_view is realized. Therefore this function will always return %FALSE
+if @tree_view is not realized or does not have a model.
For converting widget coordinates (eg. the ones you get from
GtkWidget::query-tooltip), please see
@@ -6001,16 +6083,28 @@ gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_new">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_entry">
<description>
-Creates a new empty #GtkImage widget.
+Sets the entry which the interactive search code will use for this
+ tree_view This is useful when you want to provide a search entry
+in our interface at all time at a fixed position. Passing %NULL for
+ entry will make the interactive search code use the built-in popup
+entry again.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the entry the interactive search code of @tree_view should use or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly created #GtkImage widget.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri">
@@ -6130,49 +6224,94 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_select_range">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_file">
<description>
-This function moves the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks
-simultaneously. If you move them in two steps
-with gtk_text_buffer_move_mark(), you will temporarily select a
-region in between their old and new locations, which can be pretty
-inefficient since the temporarily-selected region will force stuff
-to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can
-be optimized.
+Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
+See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ins">
-<parameter_description> where to put the "insert" mark
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the page setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="bound">
-<parameter_description> where to put the "selection_bound" mark
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_action">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_is_important">
<description>
-Gets the action for this entry.
+Checks whether @action is important or not
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the action
+<return> whether @action is important
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_file">
+<description>
+Sets @file as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
+to the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list. If
+the @chooser is in #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name
+will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
+
+If the file name isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current
+folder of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename. This
+is equivalent to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
+gtk_file_chooser_select_filename().
+
+Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
+for the directory change.
+
+If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
+you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
+user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
+does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
+a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
+file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+]|
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> the #GFile to set as current
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> location to store the error, or %NULL to ignore errors.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -6193,119 +6332,73 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_box_gap">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file">
<description>
-Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
-leaving a gap in one side.
+Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
+page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_side">
-<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_x">
-<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_width">
-<parameter_description> width of the gap
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_size">
<description>
-Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag destination. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
-gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
+Sets the icon size this icon source is intended to be used
+with.
+
+Setting the icon size on an icon source makes no difference
+if the size is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
+call gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it
+in addition to calling this function.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> icon size this source applies to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column">
+<function name="gtk_viewport_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Convenience function for setting up the most used case of this code: a
-completion list with just strings. This function will set up @completion
-to have a list displaying all (and just) strings in the completion list,
-and to get those strings from @column in the model of @completion.
-
-This functions creates and adds a #GtkCellRendererText for the selected
-column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell
-renderer, use g_object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Return value: the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
+<parameter name="viewport">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_file">
@@ -6392,53 +6485,78 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_items">
<description>
-Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
-#GtkMountOperation.
+Gets the list of recently used resources.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a list of newly allocated #GtkRecentInfo objects. Use
+gtk_recent_info_unref() on each item inside the list, and then
+free the list itself using g_list_free().
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_text">
+<function name="gtk_style_attach">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format
-(with printf()-style).
+Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
+colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
+it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
+involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
+been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
-Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
-bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
+in the following way:
+<literal>style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)</literal>
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+</parameters>
+<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
+If the style is newly created, the style parameter
+will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
+a reference count belonging to the caller.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child_model
+and @root as the virtual root.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_test_text_set">
@@ -6544,16 +6662,28 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_end_embedding">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_text">
<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
+Requests the contents of the clipboard as text and converts
+the result to UTF-8 if necessary. This function waits for
+the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
+timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
-Called to end the embedding of a plug in the socket.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly-allocated UTF-8 string which must
+be freed with g_free(), or %NULL if retrieving
+the selection data failed. (This could happen
+for various reasons, in particular if the
+clipboard was empty or if the contents of the
+clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_overwrite_mode">
@@ -6574,27 +6704,32 @@ Sets overwrite mode
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_side_image">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_render_page">
<description>
-Gets the header image for @page.
+Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
+was passed to the #GtkPrintOperation::preview handler together
+with @preview.
+A custom iprint preview should use this function in its ::expose
+handler to render the currently selected page.
+
+Note that this function requires a suitable cairo context to
+be associated with the print context.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="preview">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperationPreview
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="page_nr">
+<parameter_description> the page to render
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the side image for @page, or %NULL
-if there's no side image for the page.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toggle_action_toggled">
@@ -6695,21 +6830,21 @@ gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() on @binding_set.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkMenuToolButton">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_filter">
<description>
-The ::show-menu signal is emitted before the menu is shown.
+Adds a filter to the global list of accel path filters.
-It can be used to populate the menu on demand, using
-gtk_menu_tool_button_get_menu().
+Accel map entries whose accel path matches one of the filters
+are skipped by gtk_accel_map_foreach().
-Note that even if you populate the menu dynamically in this way,
-you must set an empty menu on the #GtkMenuToolButton beforehand,
-since the arrow is made insensitive if the menu is not set.
+This function is intended for GTK+ modules that create their own
+menus, but don't want them to be saved into the applications accelerator
+map dump.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+<parameter name="filter_pattern">
+<parameter_description> a pattern (see #GPatternSpec)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6778,14 +6913,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkFileChooserButton">
+<function name="gtk_target_table_free">
<description>
-The width of the entry and label inside the button, in characters.
+This function frees a target table as returned by
+gtk_target_table_new_from_list()
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetEntry array
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries in the array
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -6810,31 +6954,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_construct">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_short_label">
<description>
-Initializes an item factory.
+Sets a shorter label text on @action.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="container_type">
-<parameter_description> the kind of menu to create; can be
-#GTK_TYPE_MENU_BAR, #GTK_TYPE_MENU or #GTK_TYPE_OPTION_MENU
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the factory path of @ifactory, a string of the form
-<literal>"<name>"</literal>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup to which the accelerators for the
-menu items will be added, or %NULL to create a new one
+<parameter name="short_label">
+<parameter_description> the label text to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6906,32 +7039,6 @@ style property with that name.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_line_yrange">
-<description>
-Find the range of y coordinates for the paragraph containing
-the given iter.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
- height location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup">
<description>
Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
@@ -7005,15 +7112,17 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
<function name="SECTION">
<description>
-The #GtkToolShell interface allows container widgets to provide additional
-information when embedding #GtkToolItem widgets.
-
- see_also: #GtkToolbar, #GtkToolItem
+The functions and objects described here make working with GTK+ and
+GIO more convenient. #GtkMountOperation is needed when mounting volumes
+and gtk_show_uri() is a convenient way to launch applications for URIs.
+Another object that is worth mentioning in this context is
+#GdkAppLaunchContext, which provides visual feedback when lauching
+applications.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="short_description">
-<parameter_description> Interface for containers containing GtkToolItem widgets.
+<parameter_description> Functions for working with GIO
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7145,21 +7254,27 @@ gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this
-method sets #GtkIconView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
+units of @unit.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper height
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_is_default">
@@ -7205,28 +7320,21 @@ document filename, for example.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_preview_text">
<description>
-Sets the current folder for @chooser from a local filename.
-The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
-plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
+Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the full path of the new current folder
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
-otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
+This string is owned by the widget and should not be
+modified or freed
</return>
</function>
@@ -7299,26 +7407,42 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_draw_page_finish">
+<function name="gtk_button_get_image_position">
<description>
-Signalize that drawing of particular page is complete.
+Gets the position of the image relative to the text
+inside the button.
-It is called after completion of page drawing (e.g. drawing in another
-thread).
-If gtk_print_operation_set_defer_drawing() was called before, then this function
-has to be called by application. In another case it is called by the library
-itself.
-Since: 2.16
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the position
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_create_folders">
+<description>
+Gets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
+See gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the New Folder button should be displayed.
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_show_hidden">
@@ -7342,9 +7466,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="GtkInfoBar">
<description>
-When %TRUE, use the same background/foreground color as #GtkTooltip.
-Otherwise, GTK+ uses #GtkInfoBar::message-type to determine which
-symbolic colors to use.
+Width of the border around the action area of the info bar.
Since: 2.18
@@ -7484,63 +7606,24 @@ and a suitable target for text is included, otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_vertical">
<description>
-Gets the title of the color selection dialog.
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> An internal string, do not free the return value
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
-<description>
-Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
-the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="current_page">
-<parameter_description> the current page number.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_copy_clipboard">
-<description>
-Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkClipboard object to copy to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous">
<description>
Sets whether @tool_item is to be allocated the same size as other
@@ -7563,34 +7646,20 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_style">
<description>
-Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
-UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
-
+Retrieves whether the toolbar has text, icons, or both . See
+gtk_toolbar_set_style().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> the string to parse
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> the current style of @toolbar
</return>
</function>
@@ -7633,28 +7702,6 @@ by gtk_notebook_set_tab_vborder (@notebook, @border_width).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkToolButton
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_toggle_button_set_mode">
<description>
Sets whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator and label.
@@ -7755,50 +7802,64 @@ if no transient parent has been set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_right_justified">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_has_frame">
<description>
-Gets whether the menu item appears justified at the right
-side of the menu bar.
+(Note: this is a special-purpose function for the framebuffer port,
+that causes GTK+ to draw its own window border. For most applications,
+you want gtk_window_set_decorated() instead, which tells the window
+manager whether to draw the window border.)
+
+If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
+it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
+ window->window, accessible in @window->frame. Using the signal
+frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
+
+This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
+windows, but it could conceivably be used by X-programs that
+want to do their own window decorations.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> a boolean
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the menu item will appear at the
-far right if added to a menu bar.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords">
<description>
-Inserts @len bytes of @text at position @iter. If @len is -1,
- text must be nul-terminated and will be inserted in its
-entirety. Emits the "insert-text" signal; insertion actually occurs
-in the default handler for the signal. @iter is invalidated when
-insertion occurs (because the buffer contents change), but the
-default signal handler revalidates it to point to the end of the
-inserted text.
+Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window
+(see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window()).
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a position in the buffer
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> UTF-8 format text to insert
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> length of text in bytes, or -1
+<parameter name="bx">
+<parameter_description> return location for bin_window X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="by">
+<parameter_description> return location for bin_window Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7990,19 +8051,33 @@ and toggle focus between the colliding widgets otherwise.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_get_module_path">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri">
<description>
-Determines the search path for a particular type of module.
+Gets the current folder of @chooser as an URI.
+See gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
+
+Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
+(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is <emphasis>not the same</emphasis>
+as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
+#GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_SELECT_FOLDER mode
+(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/". To get the
+currently-selected folder in that mode, use gtk_file_chooser_get_uri() as the
+usual way to get the selection.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of the module, for instance 'modules', 'engines', immodules'
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the search path for the module type. Free with g_strfreev().
+<return> the URI for the current folder. Free with g_free(). This
+function will also return %NULL if the file chooser was unable to load the
+last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri() on a nonexistent folder.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -8099,42 +8174,56 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_y">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_set_page_setup">
<description>
-Obtains the vertical resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
-in dots per inch.
+Sets the #GtkPageSetup from which the page setup
+dialog takes its values.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetupUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the vertical resolution of @context
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_x">
+<function name="GtkIMContextInfo">
<description>
-Obtains the horizontal resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
-in dots per inch.
-
+Bookkeeping information about a loadable input method.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> The unique identification string of the input method.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context_name">
+<parameter_description> The human-readable name of the input method.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="domain">
+<parameter_description> Translation domain to be used with dgettext()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="domain_dirname">
+<parameter_description> Name of locale directory for use with bindtextdomain()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="default_locales">
+<parameter_description> A colon-separated list of locales where this input method
+should be the default. The asterisk "*" sets the default for all locales.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal resolution of @context
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_action_set_group">
@@ -8157,6 +8246,27 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkRadioButton">
+<description>
+Emitted when the group of radio buttons that a radio button belongs
+to changes. This is emitted when a radio button switches from
+being alone to being part of a group of 2 or more buttons, or
+vice-versa, and when a button is moved from one group of 2 or
+more buttons to a different one, but not when the composition
+of the group that a button belongs to changes.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start">
<description>
Moves backward to the previous word start. (If @iter is currently on a
@@ -8206,39 +8316,21 @@ g_free (markup);
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_default_page_setup">
<description>
-Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
-the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
-managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
-frame, or display it in other contexts.
-
-The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
-drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
-GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
-final size is known, to allow best quality.
-
-If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
-gtk_window_set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.
-
-This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon_list()
-with a 1-element list.
-
-See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
-for all windows in your application in one go.
+Returns: the default page setup
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> icon image, or %NULL
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default page setup
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width">
@@ -8365,43 +8457,21 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_render_icon">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_default_source">
<description>
-A convenience function that uses the theme engine and RC file
-settings for @widget to look up @stock_id and render it to
-a pixbuf. @stock_id should be a stock icon ID such as
-#GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. @size should be a size
-such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. @detail should be a string that
-identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so that
-theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or code.
-
-The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
-the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
-after use with g_object_unref().
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock ID
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means render at
-the size of the source and don't scale (if there are multiple
-source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> render detail to pass to theme engine
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn't known
+<return> the default source
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -8616,22 +8686,34 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
<description>
-Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
+models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
+#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
+these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
+model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
+these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
+row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
+the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
+drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
+This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
+reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
+handle drag and drop manually.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reorderable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of @size
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_file">
@@ -8753,20 +8835,17 @@ position is in characters, not in bytes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label_widget">
+<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
<description>
-Return value: The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
+Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
+of the <link linkend="im-module-file"><envar>GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE</envar></link>
+environment variable for more details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> a newly-allocated string containing the name of the file
+listing the IM modules available for loading
</return>
</function>
@@ -8873,22 +8952,25 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
<description>
-Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
+Return value: the page width.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page width.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_serialize">
@@ -9057,25 +9139,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_exists">
-<description>
-Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists. At
-the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the resource exists
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="GtkMenuBar">
<description>
The child pack direction of the menubar. It determines how
@@ -9272,28 +9335,6 @@ Gets @widget's parent window.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable">
-<description>
-Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as
-the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement
-this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drag_source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> row on which user is initiating a drag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the row can be dragged
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_move">
<description>
Asks the <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to move
@@ -9350,25 +9391,42 @@ The gtk_window_get_position() documentation may also be relevant.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkActivatable">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_title">
<description>
-Whether this activatable should reset its layout
-and appearance when setting the related action or when
-the action changes appearance.
+Sets the title of the @tree_column. If a custom widget has been set, then
+this value is ignored.
-See the #GtkAction documentation directly to find which properties
-should be ignored by the #GtkActivatable when this property is %FALSE.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> The title of the @tree_column.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
-<note><para>#GtkActivatable implementors need to handle this property
-and call gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties() on the activatable
-widget when it changes.</para></note>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_inner_border">
+<description>
+This function returns the entry's #GtkEntry:inner-border property. See
+gtk_entry_set_inner_border() for more information.
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the entry's #GtkBorder, or %NULL if none was set.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_child_anchor">
@@ -9456,20 +9514,44 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_markup">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_group">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
+Gets the current group identificator pointer for @notebook.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
+<return> the group identificator, or %NULL if none is set.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_recent_filter_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRecentFilter with no rules added to it.
+Such filter does not accept any recently used resources, so is not
+particularly useful until you add rules with
+gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern(), gtk_recent_filter_add_mime_type(),
+gtk_recent_filter_add_application(), gtk_recent_filter_add_age().
+To create a filter that accepts any recently used resource, use:
+|[
+GtkRecentFilter *filter = gtk_recent_filter_new ();
+gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
+]|
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkRecentFilter
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -9869,6 +9951,53 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_geometry">
+<description>
+Obtains information about the location of the status icon
+on screen. This information can be used to e.g. position
+popups like notification bubbles.
+
+See gtk_status_icon_position_menu() for a more convenient
+alternative for positioning menus.
+
+Note that some platforms do not allow GTK+ to provide
+this information, and even on platforms that do allow it,
+the information is not reliable unless the status icon
+is embedded in a notification area, see
+gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> return location for the screen, or %NULL if the
+information is not needed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> return location for the area occupied by the status
+icon, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> return location for the orientation of the panel
+in which the status icon is embedded, or %NULL. A panel
+at the top or bottom of the screen is horizontal, a panel
+at the left or right is vertical.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the location information has
+been filled in
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_get_pixel_size">
<description>
Gets the pixel size used for named icons.
@@ -9908,27 +10037,6 @@ gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
-<description>
-Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
-it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_not_found">
-<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active">
<description>
Activates or deactivates a cell renderer.
@@ -10082,47 +10190,6 @@ Creates a copy of the passed in #GtkStyle object.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_layout_offsets">
-<description>
-
-Obtains the position of the #PangoLayout used to render text
-in the entry, in widget coordinates. Useful if you want to line
-up the text in an entry with some other text, e.g. when using the
-entry to implement editable cells in a sheet widget.
-
-Also useful to convert mouse events into coordinates inside the
-#PangoLayout, e.g. to take some action if some part of the entry text
-is clicked.
-
-Note that as the user scrolls around in the entry the offsets will
-change; you'll need to connect to the "notify::scroll-offset"
-signal to track this. Remember when using the #PangoLayout
-functions you need to convert to and from pixels using
-PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
-
-Keep in mind that the layout text may contain a preedit string, so
-gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index() and
-gtk_entry_text_index_to_layout_index() are needed to convert byte
-indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_sensitive">
<description>
Sets the sensitivity of a widget. A widget is sensitive if the user
@@ -10185,6 +10252,32 @@ Creates a new #GtkTargetList from an array of #GtkTargetEntry.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_visible">
+<description>
+Sets the visibility state of @widget. Note that setting this to
+%TRUE doesn't mean the widget is actually viewable, see
+gtk_widget_get_visible().
+
+This function simply calls gtk_widget_show() or gtk_widget_hide()
+but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on
+some condition.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible">
+<parameter_description> whether the widget should be shown or not
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_pixels_above_lines">
<description>
Sets the default number of blank pixels above paragraphs in @text_view.
@@ -10298,44 +10391,94 @@ subclasses of those types such as %GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child">
<description>
-Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
+Sets @iter to be the child of @parent, using the given index. The first
+index is 0. If @n is too big, or @parent has no children, @iter is set
+to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned. @parent will remain a valid
+node after this function has been called. As a special case, if @parent is
+%NULL, then the @n<!-- -->th root node is set.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_hidden">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to set to the nth child.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to get the child from, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n">
+<parameter_description> Then index of the desired child.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if @parent has an @n<!-- -->th child.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_job_count">
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_insert_text">
<description>
-Gets the number of jobs currently queued on the printer.
+Inserts @n_chars characters of @chars into the contents of the
+buffer, at position @position.
+
+If @n_chars is negative, then characters from chars will be inserted
+until a null-terminator is found. If @position or @n_chars are out of
+bounds, or the maximum buffer text length is exceeded, then they are
+coerced to sane values.
+
+Note that the position and length are in characters, not in bytes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position at which to insert text.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="chars">
+<parameter_description> the text to insert into the buffer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> the length of the text in characters, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of jobs on @printer
+<return> The number of characters actually inserted.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
+<description>
+Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
+#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
+to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_queue_draw">
<description>
Equivalent to calling gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() for the
@@ -10425,20 +10568,46 @@ Most programs should not need to call this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_short_label">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text">
<description>
-Sets a shorter label text on @action.
+Like gtk_text_iter_get_text (), but invisible text is not included.
+Invisible text is usually invisible because a #GtkTextTag with the
+"invisible" attribute turned on has been applied to it.
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> iterator at start of range
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="short_label">
-<parameter_description> the label text to set
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> iterator at end of range
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> string containing visible text in the range
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_emit_deleted_text">
+<description>
+Used when subclassing #GtkEntryBuffer
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> position at which text was deleted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> number of characters deleted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10710,31 +10879,6 @@ in @x_offset and @y_offset are inclusive of the xpad and ypad properties.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string">
-<description>
-Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path_string, if it
-exists. Otherwise, @iter is left invalid and %FALSE is returned.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_string">
-<parameter_description> A string representation of a #GtkTreePath.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_set_group">
<description>
Adds @button to @group, removing it from the group it belonged to before.
@@ -10854,53 +10998,19 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
-<description>
-Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
-<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
-the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
-encoded character.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="byte_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
<description>
-Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
-past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
-the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
-moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
-the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
-moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
+Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-
-Since: 2.8
+<return> %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
</return>
</function>
@@ -11078,26 +11188,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_label">
-<description>
-Sets the label of @action.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the label text to set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_path">
<description>
Unselects the row at @path.
@@ -11118,76 +11208,54 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
+<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
<description>
-Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
+Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
+%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
+This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
+process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
+is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
+get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
+you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
+in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
+gtk_tree_path_free().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_text">
-<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
-graphics context of @style
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> the layout to draw
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> row in @tree_model
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
+is otherwise valid
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_remove_space">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_row_spacing">
<description>
-Removes a space from the specified position.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+Return value: the space between rows
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the index of the space to remove.
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the space between rows
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_can_insert">
@@ -11469,20 +11537,33 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_set_text">
<description>
-Returns: index of the icon which is the source of the current
+Sets the text in the buffer.
+
+This is roughly equivalent to calling gtk_entry_buffer_delete_text()
+and gtk_entry_buffer_insert_text().
+
+Note that @n_chars is in characters, not in bytes.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="chars">
+<parameter_description> the new text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> the number of characters in @text, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> index of the icon which is the source of the current
-DND operation, or -1.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_set_valist">
@@ -11558,35 +11639,30 @@ focused widget is activated.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_pixbuf">
<description>
-Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
-if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
+Sets the icon shown in the specified position using a pixbuf.
+
+If @pixbuf is %NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #Gdkdisplay where the selection is set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> new selection owner (a #GdkWidget), or %NULL.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the operation succeeded
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_set_modified">
@@ -11666,26 +11742,24 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
<description>
-Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="page_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default right margin
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_orientation">
@@ -11779,24 +11853,22 @@ called by models after the child state of a node changes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
<description>
-Adds @clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection
-contents of @buffer are available. In most cases, @clipboard will be
-the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
+Return value: a #GList of action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GList of action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
+and should not be modified.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_bytes_in_line">
@@ -11849,73 +11921,41 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_set_inverted">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_sensitive">
<description>
-Ranges normally move from lower to higher values as the
-slider moves from top to bottom or left to right. Inverted
-ranges have higher values at the top or on the right rather than
-on the bottom or left.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to invert the range
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
-the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
-See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment.
-
-The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
-as the entry.
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return>the cell renderer's sensitivity.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
-is moved, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
+<function name="gtk_range_set_inverted">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
+Ranges normally move from lower to higher values as the
+slider moves from top to bottom or left to right. Inverted
+ranges have higher values at the top or on the right rather than
+on the bottom or left.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to invert the range
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_n_pages">
@@ -11973,23 +12013,36 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_on_map">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
-
+Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
+<emphasis>only</emphasis> be called from a selection handler callback.
+Zero-terminates the stored data.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> the type of selection data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> format (number of bits in a unit)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> pointer to the data (will be copied)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> length of the data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
-mapped.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
@@ -12093,31 +12146,19 @@ Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_key_file">
+<function name="GtkBuilder">
<description>
-Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file.
-Return value: the restored #GtkPrintSettings
+The translation domain used when translating property values that
+have been marked as translatable in interface descriptions.
+If the translation domain is %NULL, #GtkBuilder uses gettext(),
+otherwise g_dgettext().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use
-the default "Print Settings"
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_focus_on_click">
@@ -12438,87 +12479,56 @@ Select the row at @path.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add_signal">
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_virtual">
<description>
-Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
- binding_set When the binding is activated, @signal_name will be
-emitted on the target widget, with @n_args @Varargs used as
-arguments.
+Return value: %TRUE if @printer is virtual
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to install an entry for
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to install
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to install
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="signal_name">
-<parameter_description> signal to execute upon activation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_args">
-<parameter_description> number of arguments to @signal_name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is virtual
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_show_arrow">
+<function name="gtk_test_list_all_types">
<description>
-Sets whether to show an overflow menu when
- toolbar doesn't have room for all items on it. If %TRUE,
-items that there are not room are available through an
-overflow menu.
+Return the type ids that have been registered after
+calling gtk_test_register_all_types().
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_arrow">
-<parameter_description> Whether to show an overflow menu
+<parameter name="n_types">
+<parameter_description> location to store number of types
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> 0-terminated array of type ids
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_show_fill_level">
<description>
-Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
-If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
-underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
-accelerator called a mnemonic.
-Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the label with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
+<return> %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -12588,51 +12598,54 @@ be set to 0 (zero).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
-See gtk_range_get_adjustment() for details.
+Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
+by gtk_entry_get_text()) to a position in the
+entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
+with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the adjustment associated with the scale
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
-<description>
-Return value: a string representation of the status
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="layout_index">
+<parameter_description> byte index into the entry layout text
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a string representation of the status
-of the print operation
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> byte index into the entry contents
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRadioToolButton">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_value">
<description>
-Sets a new group for a radio tool button.
+Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
+The type of @value must be convertible to the type of the
+column.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> column number to modify
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> new value for the cell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -12701,90 +12714,113 @@ rather than gtk_container_forall().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new">
+<function name="gtk_draw_focus">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileChooserDialog. This function is analogous to
-gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons().
+Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle on @window using the
+given style.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_focus() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> Open or save mode for the dialog
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_button_text">
-<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> response ID for the first button, then additional (button, id) pairs, ending with %NULL
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_set_valist">
+<function name="gtk_widget_draw">
<description>
-Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
+In GTK+ 1.2, this function would immediately render the
+region @area of a widget, by invoking the virtual draw method of a
+widget. In GTK+ 2.0, the draw method is gone, and instead
+gtk_widget_draw() simply invalidates the specified region of the
+widget, then updates the invalid region of the widget immediately.
+Usually you don't want to update the region immediately for
+performance reasons, so in general gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() is
+a better choice if you want to draw a region of a widget.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="var_args">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
-with @first_prop_name
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> area to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_key_file">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem containing a label. The label
-will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
-in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
+Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> group the radio menu item is inside
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
+"Print Settings"
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkCellRendererPixbuf">
+<description>
+The GIcon representing the icon to display.
+If the icon theme is changed, the image will be updated
+automatically.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_stock_list_ids">
<description>
Retrieves a list of all known stock IDs added to a #GtkIconFactory
@@ -12903,33 +12939,72 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_paint_box_gap">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
-page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
-
+Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
+leaving a gap in one side.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
-to use the default name "Page Setup"
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_side">
+<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_x">
+<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_width">
+<parameter_description> width of the gap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_expander_set_label">
@@ -12974,6 +13049,51 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_padding">
+<description>
+Sets the renderer's padding.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpad">
+<parameter_description> the x padding of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypad">
+<parameter_description> the y padding of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_has_grab">
+<description>
+Determines whether the widget is currently grabbing events, so it
+is the only widget receiving input events (keyboard and mouse).
+
+See also gtk_grab_add().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_model">
<description>
Sets the model for @cell_view. If @cell_view already has a model
@@ -12996,6 +13116,37 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display">
+<description>
+Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
+if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #Gdkdisplay where the selection is set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> new selection owner (a #GdkWidget), or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time_">
+<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> TRUE if the operation succeeded
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui">
<description>
Adds a UI element to the current contents of @self.
@@ -13086,55 +13237,39 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_complete">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_display_name">
<description>
-Gets whether @page is complete.
+Gets the name of the resource. If none has been defined, the basename
+of the resource is obtained.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @page is complete.
+<return> the display name of the resource. The returned string
+is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri">
+<function name="_gtk_get_module_path">
<description>
-Gets the current folder of @chooser as an URI.
-See gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
-
-Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
-(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is <emphasis>not the same</emphasis>
-as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
-#GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_SELECT_FOLDER mode
-(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/". To get the
-currently-selected folder in that mode, use gtk_file_chooser_get_uri() as the
-usual way to get the selection.
+Determines the search path for a particular type of module.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> the type of the module, for instance 'modules', 'engines', immodules'
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the URI for the current folder. Free with g_free(). This
-function will also return %NULL if the file chooser was unable to load the
-last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling
-gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri() on a nonexistent folder.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the search path for the module type. Free with g_strfreev().
</return>
</function>
@@ -13220,23 +13355,6 @@ Unselects the specified iterator.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_visibility">
-<description>
-Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
-gtk_entry_set_visibility().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the text is currently visible
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label_text">
<description>
Creates a new label and sets it as the tab label for the page
@@ -13324,54 +13442,42 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_margin">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_exists">
<description>
-Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
-which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
-of the icon view.
+Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists. At
+the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="margin">
-<parameter_description> the margin
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the resource exists
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_connect_proxy">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_context">
<description>
-Connects a widget to an action object as a proxy. Synchronises
-various properties of the action with the widget (such as label
-text, icon, tooltip, etc), and attaches a callback so that the
-action gets activated when the proxy widget does.
-
-If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected
-first.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
+#GtkPrintContext.
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> the proxy widget
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new Pango context for @context
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_binding_set_new">
@@ -13391,26 +13497,20 @@ a unique name which needs to be specified upon creation.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_filter_new">
+<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_markup">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRecentFilter with no rules added to it.
-Such filter does not accept any recently used resources, so is not
-particularly useful until you add rules with
-gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern(), gtk_recent_filter_add_mime_type(),
-gtk_recent_filter_add_application(), gtk_recent_filter_add_age().
-To create a filter that accepts any recently used resource, use:
-|[
-GtkRecentFilter *filter = gtk_recent_filter_new ();
-gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
-]|
-
+Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRecentFilter
+<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -13532,23 +13632,26 @@ g_intern_static_string().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
<description>
-Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
-gtk_label_set_width_chars().
+Sets the resize mode for the container.
+The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
+will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
+or executed immediately.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resize_mode">
+<parameter_description> the new resize mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_has_frame">
@@ -13623,14 +13726,20 @@ on #GtkWidget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_pop_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_rules_hint">
<description>
-Removes a colormap pushed with gtk_widget_push_colormap().
+Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint().
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if rules are useful for the user of this tree
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_get_style">
@@ -13839,22 +13948,16 @@ Deprecated: 2.12: use gtk_notebook_get_group() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_get_focus_on_click">
+<function name="GtkScrolledWindow">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
+Whether to place scrollbars within the scrolled window's bevel.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
-the mouse.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_tree_view">
@@ -13897,29 +14000,29 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_draw">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_length">
<description>
-In GTK+ 1.2, this function would immediately render the
-region @area of a widget, by invoking the virtual draw method of a
-widget. In GTK+ 2.0, the draw method is gone, and instead
-gtk_widget_draw() simply invalidates the specified region of the
-widget, then updates the invalid region of the widget immediately.
-Usually you don't want to update the region immediately for
-performance reasons, so in general gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() is
-a better choice if you want to draw a region of a widget.
+Return value: the length value of @key, converted to @unit
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> area to draw
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit of the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the length value of @key, converted to @unit
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toggle_button_set_inconsistent">
@@ -14050,33 +14153,23 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_logo">
<description>
-Inserts an image into the text buffer at @iter. The image will be
-counted as one character in character counts, and when obtaining
-the buffer contents as a string, will be represented by the Unicode
-"object replacement character" 0xFFFC. Note that the "slice"
-variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string include
-this character for pixbufs, but the "text" variants do
-not. e.g. see gtk_text_buffer_get_slice() and
-gtk_text_buffer_get_text().
+Return value: the pixbuf displayed as logo. The pixbuf is
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> location to insert the pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the pixbuf displayed as logo. The pixbuf is
+owned by the about dialog. If you want to keep a reference
+to it, you have to call g_object_ref() on it.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_extension_events">
@@ -14235,24 +14328,20 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source">
<description>
-Sets the default number of pixels of blank space
-to put below paragraphs in @text_view. May be overridden
-by tags applied to @text_view's buffer.
+Returns: index of the icon which is the source of the current
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixels_below_lines">
-<parameter_description> pixels below paragraphs
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> index of the icon which is the source of the current
+DND operation, or -1.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_filename">
@@ -14274,6 +14363,28 @@ icon variants for #GtkIconSet. The filename must be absolute.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders">
+<description>
+Sets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
+This is only relevant if the action is not set to be
+GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="create_folders">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the New Folder button should be displayed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_size_request">
<description>
Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
@@ -14511,23 +14622,24 @@ the spacing that will be used for newly added columns.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_type">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_equal">
<description>
-Gets the page type of @page.
+Compares two #GtkPaperSize objects.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="size1">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="size2">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page type of @page.
+<return> %TRUE, if @size1 and @size2
+represent the same paper size
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -14561,36 +14673,29 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRenderer">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_window">
<description>
-This signal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.
-The indended use of this signal is to do special setup
-on @editable, e.g. adding a #GtkEntryCompletion or setting
-up additional columns in a #GtkComboBox.
-
-Note that GTK+ doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will
-continue to use the same kind of widget for editing in future
-releases, therefore you should check the type of @editable
-before doing any specific setup.
+Retrieves the #GdkWindow corresponding to an area of the text view;
+possible windows include the overall widget window, child windows
+on the left, right, top, bottom, and the window that displays the
+text buffer. Windows are %NULL and nonexistent if their width or
+height is 0, and are nonexistent before the widget has been
+realized.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="renderer">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkCellEditable
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path identifying the edited cell
+<parameter name="win">
+<parameter_description> window to get
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GdkWindow, or %NULL
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets">
@@ -14672,26 +14777,27 @@ Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_get_related_action() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds">
<description>
-Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
-
+Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
+entire buffer lies within the range [ start,@end).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with the end iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the right margin
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_job_set_track_print_status">
@@ -14852,21 +14958,21 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the tabs are shown
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
+<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+Creates a new #GtkCheckMenuItem containing a label. The label
+will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
+in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
-used, or -1 if this is disabled.
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> a new #GtkCheckMenuItem
</return>
</function>
@@ -15108,6 +15214,24 @@ i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
+<description>
+This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
+the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
+demand by this function.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="object_class">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkObject class
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the binding set corresponding to @object_class
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_lines">
<description>
Moves @count lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
@@ -15147,20 +15271,28 @@ in the @plug.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_message_type">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_double_with_default">
<description>
-Returns: the message type of the message area.
+Return value: the floating point number associated with @key
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info_bar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="def">
+<parameter_description> the default value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the message type of the message area.
+<return> the floating point number associated with @key
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -15246,9 +15378,8 @@ tags in @text_view's buffer.
<function name="GtkSettings">
<description>
-How long to show the last input character in hidden
-entries. This value is in milliseconds. 0 disables showing the
-last char. 600 is a good value for enabling it.
+Where the contents of scrolled windows are located with respect to the
+scrollbars, if not overridden by the scrolled window's own placement.
Since: 2.10
@@ -15343,21 +15474,20 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_get_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_left_margin">
<description>
-Retrieves the accelerator path set on the menu.
+Gets the default left margin size of paragraphs in the @text_view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenu
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the accelerator path set on the menu.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> left margin in pixels
</return>
</function>
@@ -15377,75 +15507,38 @@ Gets the visual that will be used to render @widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_text_layout_get_line_xrange">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
<description>
-Find the range of X coordinates for the paragraph containing
-the given iter. Private for 2.0 due to API freeze, could
-be made public for 2.2.
+Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
+in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
+invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
+match those of this connection.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
- width location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
-<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
-<description>
-Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
-using the given style and state.
+Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
+connected to one accelerator group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x1">
-<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x2">
-<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+<parameter name="accel_flags">
+<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate
+<parameter name="closure">
+<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15549,31 +15642,6 @@ restoring the session.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set">
-<description>
-Precursor of g_object_set().
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_set() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> name of first property to set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties,
-%NULL-terminated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_window">
<description>
Return value: The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
@@ -15903,23 +15971,20 @@ correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_class_list_child_properties">
+<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_pdf">
<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cclass">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainerClass
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_properties">
-<parameter_description> location to return the number of child properties found
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*.
-The array must be freed with g_free().
-all child properties of a container class.
+<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -16034,24 +16099,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_proxies">
-<description>
-Return value: a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
-and must not be modified.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn.
@@ -16101,27 +16148,33 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_new">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_mark">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child_model
-and @root as the virtual root.
+Adds the mark at position @where. The mark must not be added to
+another buffer, and if its name is not %NULL then there must not
+be another mark in the buffer with the same name.
+Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the mark's initial
+placement.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="root">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath or %NULL.
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> the mark to add
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="where">
+<parameter_description> location to place mark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_item_remove_submenu">
@@ -16169,21 +16222,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon">
<description>
Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
@@ -16330,6 +16368,18 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkEntryBuffer">
+<description>
+The maximum length (in characters) of the text in the buffer.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_draw_polygon">
<description>
Draws a polygon on @window with the given parameters.
@@ -16370,33 +16420,6 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_polygon() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_set">
-<description>
-Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_prop_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
-with @first_prop_name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_path">
<description>
Finds an item factory which has been constructed using the
@@ -16441,6 +16464,21 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_line">
+<description>
+Return value: whether @iter is at the end of a line
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @iter is at the end of a line
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder">
<description>
Removes a folder from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
@@ -16657,42 +16695,26 @@ aligned with the menu popup position (only useful for GtkOptionMenu).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_alignment">
-<description>
-Sets the alignment for the contents of the entry. This controls
-the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
-text is shorter than the width of the entry.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
-Reversed for RTL layouts
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_cursor_visible">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_line_end">
<description>
-Find out whether the cursor is being displayed.
+Moves the iterator to point to the paragraph delimiter characters,
+which will be either a newline, a carriage return, a carriage
+return/newline in sequence, or the Unicode paragraph separator
+character. If the iterator is already at the paragraph delimiter
+characters, moves to the paragraph delimiter characters for the
+next line. If @iter is on the last line in the buffer, which does
+not end in paragraph delimiters, moves to the end iterator (end of
+the last line), and returns %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the insertion mark is visible
+<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new location is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -16872,6 +16894,24 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_page_setup_set">
+<description>
+Gets the page setup that is used by the #GtkPrintUnixDialog.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether a page setup was set by user.
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_get_image">
<description>
Gets the widget that is currently set as the image of @image_menu_item.
@@ -16958,22 +16998,25 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_filter">
<description>
-Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
-to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
-automatically determine a suitable item size.
+Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
+filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
+is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
+in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
+filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
+set of files without letting the user change it.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="item_width">
-<parameter_description> the width for each item
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17065,6 +17108,52 @@ Gets the current value of the range.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_text">
+<description>
+Retrieves the contents of the buffer.
+
+The memory pointer returned by this call will not change
+unless this object emits a signal, or is finalized.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a pointer to the contents of the widget as a
+string. This string points to internally allocated
+storage in the buffer and must not be freed, modified or
+stored.
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_complete">
+<description>
+Gets whether @page is complete.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @page is complete.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_range">
<description>
Sets the minimum and maximum allowable values for @spin_button
@@ -17152,66 +17241,18 @@ in @path, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup">
+<function name="gtk_cell_editable_editing_done">
<description>
-Creates a new message dialog, which is a simple dialog with an icon
-indicating the dialog type (error, warning, etc.) and some text which
-is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-When the user clicks a button a "response" signal is emitted with
-response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See #GtkDialog for more details.
-
-Special XML characters in the printf() arguments passed to this
-function will automatically be escaped as necessary.
-(See g_markup_printf_escaped() for how this is implemented.)
-Usually this is what you want, but if you have an existing
-Pango markup string that you want to use literally as the
-label, then you need to use gtk_message_dialog_set_markup()
-instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
-as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
-argument.
-|[
-GtkWidget *dialog;
-dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (main_application_window,
-GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
-GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
-GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
-NULL);
-gtk_message_dialog_set_markup (GTK_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
-markup);
-]|
-
+Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> type of message
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buttons">
-<parameter_description> set of buttons to use
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkMessageDialog
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_column">
@@ -17450,14 +17491,26 @@ will disable caching.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_free">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_line_yrange">
<description>
-Free's @reference. @reference may be %NULL.
+Find the range of y coordinates for the paragraph containing
+the given iter.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
+or %NULL.
+ height location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
+or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17531,6 +17584,24 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_title">
+<description>
+Gets the title of the color selection dialog.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> An internal string, do not free the return value
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_class_find_child_property">
<description>
Finds a child property of a container class by name.
@@ -17551,14 +17622,23 @@ child property with that name.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRuler">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_track_visited_links">
<description>
-The metric used for the ruler.
+Sets whether the label should keep track of clicked
+links (and use a different color for them).
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="track_links">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to track visited links
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -17603,6 +17683,19 @@ to be emitted).
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkTreeViewColumn">
+<description>
+Logical sort column ID this column sorts on when selected for sorting. Setting the sort column ID makes the column header
+clickable. Set to %-1 to make the column unsortable.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_list_shortcut_folder_uris">
<description>
Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
@@ -17624,6 +17717,30 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
+<description>
+Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
+the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
+gtk_layout_set_size ().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_expand">
<description>
Return %TRUE if the column expands to take any available space.
@@ -17662,23 +17779,60 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line_offset">
<description>
-Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in
-the about dialog. If it is %NULL, the default
-window icon set with gtk_window_set_default_icon()
-will be used.
+Obtains an iterator pointing to @char_offset within the given
+line. The @char_offset must exist, offsets off the end of the line
+are not allowed. Note <emphasis>characters</emphasis>, not bytes;
+UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
-Since: 2.6
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="line_number">
+<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="char_offset">
+<parameter_description> char offset from start of line
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_construct">
+<description>
+Initializes an item factory.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
+<parameter name="container_type">
+<parameter_description> the kind of menu to create; can be
+#GTK_TYPE_MENU_BAR, #GTK_TYPE_MENU or #GTK_TYPE_OPTION_MENU
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the factory path of @ifactory, a string of the form
+<literal>"<name>"</literal>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup to which the accelerators for the
+menu items will be added, or %NULL to create a new one
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17701,29 +17855,65 @@ Like gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position(), but moves backward.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
<description>
-Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
-entire buffer lies within the range [ start,@end).
+Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
+for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
+information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
+A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
+text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
+is not set.
+
+The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
+#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with the end iterator
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
+<description>
+Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the right margin
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_context_get_height">
<description>
Obtains the height of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
@@ -17813,21 +18003,19 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
<description>
-Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
-menu item.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
+increased.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to add tearoff menu items
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> The index.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17884,35 +18072,22 @@ use @selection is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_query_tab_label_packing">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_get_active">
<description>
-Query the packing attributes for the tab label of the page
-containing @child.
+Queries a #GtkToggleToolButton and returns its current state.
+Return value: %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> location to store the expand value (or NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> location to store the fill value (or NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pack_type">
-<parameter_description> location to store the pack_type (or NULL)
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_key_file">
@@ -17955,28 +18130,19 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_filter_get_needed">
+<function name="gtk_accessible_connect_widget_destroyed">
<description>
-Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
-passed to gtk_recent_filter_filter()
-
-This function will not typically be used by applications; it
-is intended principally for use in the implementation of
-#GtkRecentChooser.
-
+This function specifies the callback function to be called when the widget
+corresponding to a GtkAccessible is destroyed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+<parameter name="accessible">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccessible
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
-calling gtk_recent_filter_filter()
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_error">
@@ -18080,21 +18246,21 @@ Return value: a newly-created #GtkTreePath.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_entry_new_with_buffer">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCheckMenuItem containing a label. The label
-will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
-in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
+Creates a new entry with the specified text buffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> The buffer to use for the new #GtkEntry.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCheckMenuItem
+<return> a new #GtkEntry
+
+Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -18198,20 +18364,20 @@ e.g. use 1 to display 1.0, 2 to display 1.00, etc
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_has_selection">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
<description>
-Sets whether a selection exists.
+Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag source. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
+gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_selection">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE indicates that a selection exists
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18293,6 +18459,37 @@ function is used by language bindings.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_enum">
+<description>
+A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
+or gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser() which parses a single
+enumeration value.
+
+The enumeration value can be specified by its name, its nickname or
+its numeric value. For consistency with flags parsing, the value
+may be surrounded by parentheses.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pspec">
+<parameter_description> a #GParamSpec
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gstring">
+<parameter_description> the #GString to be parsed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property_value">
+<parameter_description> a #GValue which must hold enum values.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
+has been set to the resulting #GEnumValue.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_double">
<description>
Return value: the double value of @key
@@ -18427,30 +18624,6 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_new_with_stock_from_widget">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton adding it to the same group as @group.
-The new #GtkRadioToolButton will contain an icon and label from the
-stock item indicated by @stock_id.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioToolButton.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of a stock item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkRadioToolButton
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_context">
<description>
This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
@@ -18575,24 +18748,6 @@ method to clear the preedit state.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
-<description>
-Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_position">
<description>
Moves @iter forward to the previous visible cursor position. See
@@ -18687,34 +18842,39 @@ you'd like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_mark_new">
+<function name="gtk_alignment_set_padding">
<description>
-Creates a text mark. Add it to a buffer using gtk_text_buffer_add_mark().
-If @name is %NULL, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be
-retrieved by name using gtk_text_buffer_get_mark(). If a mark has left
-gravity, and text is inserted at the mark's current location, the mark
-will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has
-right gravity (@left_gravity = %FALSE), the mark will end up on the
-right of newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a
-mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right
-side of the text you're typing).
+Sets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
+The padding adds blank space to the sides of the widget. For instance,
+this can be used to indent the child widget towards the right by adding
+padding on the left.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> mark name or %NULL
+<parameter name="alignment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAlignment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="left_gravity">
-<parameter_description> whether the mark should have left gravity
+<parameter name="padding_top">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the top of the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding_bottom">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the bottom of the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding_left">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the left of the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding_right">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the right of the widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> new #GtkTextMark
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_info_copy">
@@ -19041,18 +19201,16 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_homogeneous_tabs">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_prefix">
<description>
-Sets whether the tabs must have all the same size or not.
+Requests a prefix insertion.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="homogeneous">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if all tabs should be the same size.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19419,31 +19577,22 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_add_action_widget">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_proxies">
<description>
-Adds an activatable widget to the action area of a #GtkDialog,
-connecting a signal handler that will emit the #GtkDialog::response
-signal on the dialog when the widget is activated. The widget is
-appended to the end of the dialog's action area. If you want to add a
-non-activatable widget, simply pack it into the @action_area field
-of the #GtkDialog struct.
+Return value: a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> an activatable widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="response_id">
-<parameter_description> response ID for @child
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
+and must not be modified.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_entry">
@@ -19658,22 +19807,32 @@ wildcarded.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_plug_get_socket_window">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_pack_start">
<description>
-Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
+Packs the @cell into the beginning of @cell_layout. If @expand is %FALSE,
+then the @cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
+is divided evenly between cells for which @expand is %TRUE.
+Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the window of the socket, or %NULL
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_mark">
@@ -19723,27 +19882,21 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_reset_default_sort_func">
<description>
-Gets the paper width of the #GtkPaperSize, in
-units of @unit.
-
+This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That
+is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model
+to be in the same order as the child model only if the #GtkTreeModelSort
+is in 'unsorted' state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper width
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_swap">
@@ -20173,14 +20326,28 @@ Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_queue_draw() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_xembed_pop_message">
+<function name="gtk_targets_include_text">
<description>
-Removes an event added with _gtk_xembed_push_message()
+Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide text.
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the length of @targets
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for text,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="GtkSpinButton">
@@ -20289,11 +20456,10 @@ submenu is passed.
<function name="GtkFileChooser">
<description>
-Whether a file chooser in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode
-will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
-selects a file name that already exists.
+Whether a file chooser not in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN mode
+will offer the user to create new folders.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20351,37 +20517,47 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_free">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_text_column">
<description>
-Frees a #GtkSelectionData structure returned from
-gtk_selection_data_copy().
+Return value: the column containing the strings
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the column containing the strings
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_get_screen">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_forward_display_line">
<description>
-Gets the screen on which windows of the #GtkMountOperation
-will be shown.
+Moves the given @iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.
+A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
+separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
+Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
+wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
+same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the screen on which windows of @op are shown
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -20557,28 +20733,6 @@ for the widget).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_prepend_page">
-<description>
-Prepends a page to the @assistant.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting at 0) of the inserted page
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_clipboard_clear">
<description>
Clears the contents of the clipboard. Generally this should only
@@ -20635,29 +20789,28 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_length">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_alignment">
<description>
-Return value: the length value of @key, converted to @unit
+Fills in @xalign and @yalign with the appropriate values of @cell.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit of the return value
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the length value of @key, converted to @unit
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity">
@@ -20704,24 +20857,21 @@ See gtk_misc_set_padding().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_child_visible">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_format">
<description>
-Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
-If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
-needs reorganization.
-
-This function is only useful for container implementations and
-never should be called by an application.
+Retrieves the format of the selection.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
+<return> the format of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -20887,6 +21037,24 @@ gtk_widget_set_direction().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_gicon">
+<description>
+Gets the gicon of @action.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The action's #GIcon if one is set.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_get_monitor">
<description>
Retrieves the number of the monitor on which to show the menu.
@@ -20906,27 +21074,55 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
+<function name="gtk_paint_polygon">
<description>
-An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
-changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
-adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
-the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
-
+Draws a polygon on @window with the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="points">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint<!-- -->s
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_points">
+<parameter_description> length of @points
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the polygon should be filled
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
-since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
-the color value status to be final.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_above">
@@ -21110,6 +21306,24 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_snap_edge">
+<description>
+Gets the edge used for determining reattachment of the handle box. See
+gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="handle_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the edge used for determining reattachment, or (GtkPositionType)-1 if this
+is determined (as per default) from the handle position.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_icon">
<description>
Retrieves the icon of size @size associated to the resource MIME type.
@@ -21153,26 +21367,19 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_current_alpha">
<description>
-Sets the icon shown in the specified position using a pixbuf.
-
-If @pixbuf is %NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
-
-Since: 2.16
+Sets the current opacity to be @alpha. The first time this is called, it will
+also set the original opacity to be @alpha too.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
+<parameter name="alpha">
+<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21339,25 +21546,18 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
<description>
-Like gtk_text_iter_get_text (), but invisible text is not included.
-Invisible text is usually invisible because a #GtkTextTag with the
-"invisible" attribute turned on has been applied to it.
-
+Return value: %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> iterator at start of range
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> iterator at end of range
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> string containing visible text in the range
+<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
</return>
</function>
@@ -21427,22 +21627,25 @@ This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set">
<description>
-Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
-up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
-language</link>.
+Precursor of g_object_set().
-Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_set() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> name of first property to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties,
+%NULL-terminated
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21512,26 +21715,26 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_set_show_fill_level">
+<function name="gtk_widget_hide_on_delete">
<description>
-Sets whether a graphical fill level is show on the trough. See
-gtk_range_set_fill_level() for a general description of the fill
-level concept.
+Utility function; intended to be connected to the #GtkWidget::delete-event
+signal on a #GtkWindow. The function calls gtk_widget_hide() on its
+argument, then returns %TRUE. If connected to ::delete-event, the
+result is that clicking the close button for a window (on the
+window frame, top right corner usually) will hide but not destroy
+the window. By default, GTK+ destroys windows when ::delete-event
+is received.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_fill_level">
-<parameter_description> Whether a fill level indicator graphics is shown.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell">
@@ -21676,13 +21879,11 @@ Since: 2.14
<function name="GtkLabel">
<description>
-The desired maximum width of the label, in characters. If this property
-is set to -1, the width will be calculated automatically, otherwise the
-label will request space for no more than the requested number of
-characters. If the #GtkLabel:width-chars property is set to a positive
-value, then the "max-width-chars" property is ignored.
+Set this property to %TRUE to make the label track which links
+have been clicked. It will then apply the ::visited-link-color
+color, instead of ::link-color.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21763,6 +21964,24 @@ i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_child_detached">
+<description>
+Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="handle_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the child is currently detached, otherwise %FALSE
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_completion_prefix">
<description>
Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
@@ -21820,22 +22039,24 @@ Sets the shadow type of the viewport.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_entry_append_text">
<description>
-Gets the gicon of @action.
+Appends the given text to the contents of the widget.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the text to append
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The action's #GIcon if one is set.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_row_separator_func">
@@ -22130,26 +22351,20 @@ Return value: a #GtkTextBuffer
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_order">
<description>
-Sets the #GdkScreen where the @window is displayed; if
-the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
-then remapped on the new screen.
+Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order().
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the sort order the sort indicator is indicating
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_alignment">
@@ -22259,48 +22474,46 @@ within the preedit string.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_position">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_focus">
<description>
-Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
-coordinates @x and @y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
-the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
-If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
-those to buffer coordinates with
-gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
-
-Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
-which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions <emphasis>between</emphasis>
-characters.
+Specifies whether @widget can own the input focus. See
+gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
+widget.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="trailing">
-<parameter_description> if non-%NULL, location to store an integer indicating where
-in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
-zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
-0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x position, in buffer coordinates
+<parameter name="can_focus">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y position, in buffer coordinates
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_text">
+<description>
+Retrieves the text displayed superimposed on the progress bar,
+if any, otherwise %NULL. The return value is a reference
+to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid
+if you change the text in the progress bar.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> text, or %NULL; this string is owned by the widget
+and should not be modified or freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_with_values">
@@ -22406,54 +22619,40 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_im_module_create">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
<description>
-Create an IM context of a type specified by the string
-ID @context_id.
+Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> the context ID for the context type to create
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly created input context of or @context_id, or
-if that could not be created, a newly created GtkIMContextSimple.
+<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
+
+Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
<description>
-Set the accelerator path on @menu_item, through which runtime changes of the
-menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be identified and saved to
-persistant storage (see gtk_accel_map_save() on this).
-To setup a default accelerator for this menu item, call
-gtk_accel_map_add_entry() with the same @accel_path.
-See also gtk_accel_map_add_entry() on the specifics of accelerator paths,
-and gtk_menu_set_accel_path() for a more convenient variant of this function.
-
-This function is basically a convenience wrapper that handles calling
-gtk_widget_set_accel_path() with the appropriate accelerator group for
-the menu item.
-
-Note that you do need to set an accelerator on the parent menu with
-gtk_menu_set_accel_group() for this to work.
+Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
+the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
+in a table.
-Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
-g_intern_static_string().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenuItem
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> accelerator path, corresponding to this menu item's
-functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Preferred number of columns
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22478,14 +22677,43 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_free">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_allocation">
<description>
-Frees @path.
+Sets the widget's allocation. This should not be used
+directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="allocation">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_size_group_set_ignore_hidden">
+<description>
+Sets whether unmapped widgets should be ignored when
+calculating the size.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ignore_hidden">
+<parameter_description> whether unmapped widgets should be ignored
+when calculating the size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22662,25 +22890,45 @@ _gtk_recent_chooser_delegate_iface_init().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license">
+<function name="gtk_builder_value_from_string">
<description>
-Sets whether the license text in @about is
-automatically wrapped.
+This function demarshals a value from a string. This function
+calls g_value_init() on the @value argument, so it need not be
+initialised beforehand.
+
+This function can handle char, uchar, boolean, int, uint, long,
+ulong, enum, flags, float, double, string, #GdkColor and
+#GtkAdjustment type values. Support for #GtkWidget type values is
+still to come.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap_license">
-<parameter_description> whether to wrap the license
+<parameter name="pspec">
+<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the property
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string representation of the value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the #GValue to store the result in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_cursor_position">
@@ -22730,6 +22978,33 @@ that somewhat like strcmp() returning 0 for equality
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_clear">
+<description>
+The default handler for the #GtkWidget::selection-clear-event
+signal.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the event was handled, otherwise false
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Instead of calling this function, chain up from
+your selection-clear-event handler. Calling this function
+from any other context is illegal.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
<description>
Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
@@ -22750,29 +23025,16 @@ See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label">
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_new">
<description>
-Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
-this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). Note the
-list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the
-widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update
-its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection
-to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal or a weak notifier.
+Creates a new #GtkIMMulticontext.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that acts as a mnemonic label for @widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkIMMulticontext.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_accel_new">
@@ -22850,27 +23112,85 @@ is searched in the current directory.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
<description>
-Return value: the paper height.
+Return value: a string representation of the status
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper height.
+<return> a string representation of the status
+of the print operation
Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
+<description>
+Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
+See gtk_status_icon_new_from_file() for details.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> a filename
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_begin_resize_drag">
+<description>
+Starts resizing a window. This function is used if an application
+has window resizing controls. When GDK can support it, the resize
+will be done using the standard mechanism for the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> or windowing
+system. Otherwise, GDK will try to emulate window resizing,
+potentially not all that well, depending on the windowing system.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> mouse button that initiated the drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="edge">
+<parameter_description> position of the resize control
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_x">
+<parameter_description> X position where the user clicked to initiate the drag, in root window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_y">
+<parameter_description> Y position where the user clicked to initiate the drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="timestamp">
+<parameter_description> timestamp from the click event that initiated the drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_backspace">
<description>
Performs the appropriate action as if the user hit the delete
@@ -22910,6 +23230,26 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
+<description>
+Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_add_action">
<description>
Adds an action object to the action group. Note that this function
@@ -23011,18 +23351,40 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
<description>
-Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
+Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
+label in the popup menu.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu_label">
+<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
+menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
+is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
+a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
+If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
+specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_select_path">
@@ -23092,29 +23454,19 @@ Gets the value of a child property for @child and @container.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset">
+<function name="GtkToolButton">
<description>
-This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
-format with the passed @buffer. See
-gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
-
+This signal is emitted when the tool button is clicked with the mouse
+or activated with the keyboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tagset_name">
-<parameter_description> an optional tagset name, on %NULL
+<parameter name="toolbutton">
+<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_new">
@@ -23211,35 +23563,30 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_targets">
<description>
-Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
-Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
-followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
-words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
-from the last added.
+Requests the contents of the clipboard as list of supported targets.
+When the list is later received, @callback will be called.
-The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
-numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
-the length of the sequence should be zero.)
+The @targets parameter to @callback will contain the resulting targets if
+the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_simple">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> the table
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_seq_len">
-<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
-(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when the targets are received,
+or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
+one way or the other.)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_seqs">
-<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -23266,23 +23613,20 @@ You must free this iter with gtk_tree_iter_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter">
+<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
-the display of the recently used resources.
+Reenable activation signals from the action
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkRecentFilter object.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_modal">
@@ -23323,29 +23667,51 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_rich_text">
+<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
<description>
-Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
-determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide rich text.
+This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
+Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
+and it automatically generates nicely formatted
+<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
+be terminated after writing out the help output.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parameter_string">
+<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
+the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
+<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
+describing the options of your program
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="translation_domain">
+<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
+the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
+with gettext(), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for errors
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
-and a suitable target for rich text is included,
-otherwise %FALSE.
+<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
+%FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -23372,6 +23738,23 @@ Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_sensitive">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive, which means
+it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensntive
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_groups">
<description>
Return value: a newly allocated %NULL terminated array of strings. Use
@@ -23587,13 +23970,24 @@ Since: 2.16
<function name="GtkEntry">
<description>
-Indicates whether to pass a proper widget state when
-drawing the shadow and the widget background.
+This signal is emitted after text is deleted from the buffer.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position the text was deleted at.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> The number of characters that were deleted.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -23797,6 +24191,27 @@ reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_buffer">
+<description>
+Set the #GtkEntryBuffer object which holds the text for
+this widget.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_destroy">
<description>
Destroys a widget. Equivalent to gtk_object_destroy(), except that
@@ -23976,21 +24391,20 @@ gtk_widget_size_request().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step">
+<function name="gtk_editable_set_editable">
<description>
-Sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress
-bouncing block for each call to gtk_entry_progress_pulse().
-
-Since: 2.16
+Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
+widget or not.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="fraction">
-<parameter_description> fraction between 0.0 and 1.0
+<parameter name="is_editable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text
+in the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -24083,59 +24497,44 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution">
+<function name="_gtk_plug_add_to_socket">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
-
+Adds a plug to a socket within the same application.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="socket_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the resolution in dpi
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_hline">
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
-using the given style and state.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_hline() instead.
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem containing a label. The label
+will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
+in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x1">
-<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x2">
-<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> group the radio menu item is inside
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_dialog_new_for_manager">
@@ -24240,17 +24639,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label_widget">
<description>
-Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
-of the <link linkend="im-module-file"><envar>GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE</envar></link>
-environment variable for more details.
+Return value: The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated string containing the name of the file
-listing the IM modules available for loading
+<return> The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -24272,25 +24674,43 @@ If the element at @iter is a pixbuf, the pixbuf is returned
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment">
<description>
-Return value: the page width.
+Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page width.
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
+<description>
+Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
+#GtkMountOperation.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_ensure_style">
@@ -24433,24 +24853,41 @@ Creates a new #GtkFontSelection.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_draw_hline">
<description>
-Checks if an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
-used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
+using the given style and state.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_hline() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x1">
+<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x2">
+<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if an embedded underline in the label indicates
-the mnemonic accelerator key.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_path_bar_down">
@@ -24762,6 +25199,7 @@ inside a #GtkSocket within the same application.
To reliably find the toplevel #GtkWindow, use
gtk_widget_get_toplevel() and check if the %TOPLEVEL flags
is set on the result.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
@@ -24837,6 +25275,37 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_from_array">
+<description>
+Sets an alternative button order. If the
+#GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
+the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
+response ids in @new_order.
+
+See gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more information.
+
+This function is for use by language bindings.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_params">
+<parameter_description> the number of response ids in @new_order
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GtkMenuShell">
<description>
A boolean that determines whether the menu and its submenus grab the
@@ -24867,19 +25336,31 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_width_chars().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkBuilder">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_key_file">
<description>
-The translation domain used when translating property values that
-have been marked as translatable in interface descriptions.
-If the translation domain is %NULL, #GtkBuilder uses gettext(),
-otherwise g_dgettext().
-
-Since: 2.12
+Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file.
+Return value: the restored #GtkPrintSettings
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use
+the default "Print Settings"
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_mnemonic_widget">
@@ -24945,37 +25426,37 @@ Returns: the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_completion">
<description>
-Get the value in the @spin_button.
-
+Return value: %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the value of @spin_button
+<return> %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
+
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_lower">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_visibility">
<description>
-Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
+Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
+gtk_entry_set_visibility().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current minimum value of the adjustment.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> %TRUE if the text is currently visible
</return>
</function>
@@ -25029,37 +25510,31 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_rules_hint">
+<function name="gtk_widget_pop_colormap">
<description>
-Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint().
-
+Removes a colormap pushed with gtk_widget_push_colormap().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if rules are useful for the user of this tree
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
<description>
-Returns: the icon name or %NULL if the window has
+Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="other">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the icon name or %NULL if the window has
-no themed icon
+<return> a copy of @other
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -25101,30 +25576,26 @@ gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags() is just a convenience function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_prepend">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_char">
<description>
-Prepends a new row to @tree_store. If @parent is non-%NULL, then it will prepend
-the new row before the first child of @parent, otherwise it will prepend a row
-to the top level. @iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row
-will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to
-call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
+Moves @iter forward by one character offset. Note that images
+embedded in the buffer occupy 1 character slot, so
+gtk_text_iter_forward_char () may actually move onto an image instead
+of a character, if you have images in your buffer. If @iter is the
+end iterator or one character before it, @iter will now point at
+the end iterator, and gtk_text_iter_forward_char () returns %FALSE for
+convenience when writing loops.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepended row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_increments">
@@ -25150,19 +25621,20 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_increments().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_palette">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
<description>
-Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of @has_palette.
+Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_palette">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if palette is to be visible, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> a title for the menu in tearoff mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25299,6 +25771,28 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
+<description>
+Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
+up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
+language</link>.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int">
<description>
Return value: the integer value of @key
@@ -25366,51 +25860,40 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_double_with_default">
+<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_message_type">
<description>
-Return value: the floating point number associated with @key
+Returns: the message type of the message area.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="def">
-<parameter_description> the default value
+<parameter name="info_bar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the floating point number associated with @key
+<return> the message type of the message area.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the
-attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.
-You'd typically pass the default attributes in to
-gtk_text_iter_get_attributes() in order to get the
-attributes in effect at a given text position.
-
-The return value is a copy owned by the caller of this function,
-and should be freed.
+Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
+appropriately.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkTextAttributes
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -25507,23 +25990,6 @@ overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_pdf">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_for_display">
<description>
Return value: the appropriate clipboard object. If no
@@ -25551,27 +26017,6 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_new_from_stock">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkButton containing the image and text from a stock item.
-Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK and
-#GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-If @stock_id is unknown, then it will be treated as a mnemonic
-label (as for gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic()).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkButton
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
<description>
Return value: number of tags in @table
@@ -25587,29 +26032,6 @@ Return value: number of tags in @table
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds">
-<description>
-Return value: whether the selection has nonzero length
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with selection start
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with selection end
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether the selection has nonzero length
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="_gtk_action_sync_menu_visible">
<description>
Updates the visibility of @proxy from the visibility of @action
@@ -25642,21 +26064,27 @@ This function is used in the implementation of #GtkUIManager.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_alignment">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
+Sets the alignment for the contents of the entry. This controls
+the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
+text is shorter than the width of the entry.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
+Reversed for RTL layouts
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_cell">
@@ -25868,31 +26296,21 @@ Simply an accessor function that returns @widget->style.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
<description>
-Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
-to be @rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for
-properly setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView rows and cells, #GtkIconViews,
-etc.
-
-For setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView, please refer to the convenience
-functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and
-gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().
-
-Since: 2.12
+Return value: A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rect">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_size_lookup">
@@ -25994,26 +26412,27 @@ reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement">
<description>
-Sets a #PangoAttrList; the attributes in the list are applied to the
-label text.
+Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
+for the scrolled window.
-<note><para>The attributes set with this function will be applied
-and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way
-of the #GtkLabel:use-underline or #GtkLabel:use-markup properties.
-While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set
-attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied
-to the label after the markup string is parsed.</para></note>
+The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
+in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
+Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
+%GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and %GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.
+
+See also gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement() and
+gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="attrs">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList
+<parameter name="window_placement">
+<parameter_description> position of the child window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26041,45 +26460,37 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_copy_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_modifier_style">
<description>
-Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
-puts it on the clipboard.
+Return value: the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is
+owned by the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this
+around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_set_text">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_activatable">
<description>
-Sets the contents of the selection from a UTF-8 encoded string.
-The string is converted to the form determined by
- selection_data->target.
-
+Return value: %TRUE if the cell renderer is activatable.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> a UTF-8 string
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> the length of @str, or -1 if @str is nul-terminated.
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
-otherwise %FALSE.
+<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is activatable.
+
+Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -26308,6 +26719,27 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_to_path">
+<description>
+Expands the row at @path. This will also expand all parent rows of
+ path as necessary.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> path to a row.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_table_get_row_spacing">
<description>
Gets the amount of space between row @row, and
@@ -26334,6 +26766,8 @@ row @row + 1. See gtk_table_set_row_spacing().
Sets the text in the widget to the given
value, replacing the current contents.
+See gtk_entry_buffer_set_text().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="entry">
@@ -26458,19 +26892,20 @@ you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_order">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order().
-
+Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the sort order the sort indicator is indicating
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+
+Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -26540,24 +26975,6 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_create_menu_item">
-<description>
-Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a menu item connected to the action.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_select_uri">
<description>
Selects @uri inside @chooser.
@@ -26796,24 +27213,18 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_example_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_type">
<description>
-Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
-current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
-a list of themes to the user.)
-
+Return value: a #GType.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of an example icon or %NULL.
-Free with g_free().
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> a #GType.
</return>
</function>
@@ -26976,28 +27387,21 @@ Returns: GDK keyval usable for accelerators, or #GDK_VoidSymbol
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
<description>
-Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Return value: the location of @printer
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="margin">
-<parameter_description> the new bottom margin in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the units for @margin
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the location of @printer
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_gicon">
@@ -27084,94 +27488,104 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_char">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_prepend">
<description>
-Moves @iter forward by one character offset. Note that images
-embedded in the buffer occupy 1 character slot, so
-gtk_text_iter_forward_char () may actually move onto an image instead
-of a character, if you have images in your buffer. If @iter is the
-end iterator or one character before it, @iter will now point at
-the end iterator, and gtk_text_iter_forward_char () returns %FALSE for
-convenience when writing loops.
-
+Prepends a new row to @tree_store. If @parent is non-%NULL, then it will prepend
+the new row before the first child of @parent, otherwise it will prepend a row
+to the top level. @iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row
+will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to
+call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepended row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
+<function name="gtk_button_set_alignment">
<description>
-This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
-the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
-demand by this function.
+Sets the alignment of the child. This property has no effect unless
+the child is a #GtkMisc or a #GtkAligment.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object_class">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkObject class
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal position of the child, 0.0 is left aligned,
+1.0 is right aligned
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the vertical position of the child, 0.0 is top aligned,
+1.0 is bottom aligned
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the binding set corresponding to @object_class
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_set">
<description>
-Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
-then the old model is unset. The sort function is unset as a result
-of this call. The model will be in an unsorted state until a sort
-function is set.
+Gets the icon set and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
+The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModelSort.
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> location to store a #GtkIconSet, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> location to store a stock icon size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_mark">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds">
<description>
-Adds the mark at position @where. The mark must not be added to
-another buffer, and if its name is not %NULL then there must not
-be another mark in the buffer with the same name.
-
-Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the mark's initial
-placement.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Return value: whether the selection has nonzero length
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mark">
-<parameter_description> the mark to add
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with selection start
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="where">
-<parameter_description> location to place mark
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with selection end
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether the selection has nonzero length
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_update">
@@ -27443,48 +27857,17 @@ when the focus chain is actually traversed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_handle">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_thaw">
<description>
-Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
+Does nothing. Previously defrosted a calendar; all the changes made
+since the last gtk_calendar_freeze() were displayed.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_handle() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.8:
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> with of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientation of the handle
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27590,21 +27973,20 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_focus_cell">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_support_selection">
<description>
-Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @cell, if the column contains
-2 or more editable and activatable cells.
+Sets whether the print dialog allows user to print a selection.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+<parameter name="support_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to allow print selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27727,20 +28109,21 @@ Return value: #GtkJustification
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_support_selection">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_focus_cell">
<description>
-Sets whether the print dialog allows user to print a selection.
+Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @cell, if the column contains
+2 or more editable and activatable cells.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="support_selection">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to allow print selection
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27765,25 +28148,39 @@ or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_move_mark_onscreen">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags_by_name">
<description>
-Moves a mark within the buffer so that it's
-located within the currently-visible text area.
-
+Same as gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags(), but allows you
+to pass in tag names instead of tag objects.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mark">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> position in @buffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> UTF-8 text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> length of @text, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_tag_name">
+<parameter_description> name of a tag to apply to @text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> more tag names
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the mark moved (wasn't already onscreen)
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_menu_entries">
@@ -27809,7 +28206,9 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_dest_row_at_pos">
<description>
Determines the destination row for a given position. @drag_x and
- drag_y are expected to be in widget coordinates.
+ drag_y are expected to be in widget coordinates. This function is only
+meaningful if @tree_view is realized. Therefore this function will always
+return %FALSE if @tree_view is not realized or does not have a model.
</description>
@@ -27835,7 +28234,8 @@ Determines the destination row for a given position. @drag_x and
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether there is a row at the given position.
+<return> whether there is a row at the given position, %TRUE if this
+is indeed the case.
</return>
</function>
@@ -27888,6 +28288,27 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_embed_page_setup">
+<description>
+Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+Selected page setup is stored as default page setup in #GtkPrintOperation.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embed">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to embed page setup selection in the #GtkPrintDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_box_set_spacing">
<description>
Sets the #GtkBox:spacing property of @box, which is the
@@ -27975,37 +28396,22 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_move_item">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_reorderable">
<description>
-Changes the location of a recently used resource from @uri to @new_uri.
-
-Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
-by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
+Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop.
+See gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI of a recently used resource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_uri">
-<parameter_description> the new URI of the recently used resource, or %NULL to
-remove the item pointed by @uri in the list
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success.
+<return> %TRUE if the list can be reordered.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -28092,27 +28498,29 @@ default icon source based on the given pixbuf.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_child_notify">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_path_to_child_path">
<description>
-Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
-<link linkend="child-properties">child property</link> @child_property
-on @widget.
+Converts @filter_path to a path on the child model of @filter. That is,
+ filter_path points to a location in @filter. The returned path will
+point to the same location in the model not being filtered. If @filter_path
+does not point to a location in the child model, %NULL is returned.
-This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_property">
-<parameter_description> the name of a child property installed on the
-class of @widget<!-- -->'s parent
+<parameter name="filter_path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_detachable">
@@ -28136,51 +28544,30 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_check_version">
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_file">
<description>
-Checks that the GTK+ library in use is compatible with the
-given version. Generally you would pass in the constants
-#GTK_MAJOR_VERSION, #GTK_MINOR_VERSION, #GTK_MICRO_VERSION
-as the three arguments to this function; that produces
-a check that the library in use is compatible with
-the version of GTK+ the application or module was compiled
-against.
-
-Compatibility is defined by two things: first the version
-of the running library is newer than the version
- required_major required_minor @required_micro. Second
-the running library must be binary compatible with the
-version @required_major required_minor required_micro
-(same major version.)
-
-This function is primarily for GTK+ modules; the module
-can call this function to check that it wasn't loaded
-into an incompatible version of GTK+. However, such a
-a check isn't completely reliable, since the module may be
-linked against an old version of GTK+ and calling the
-old version of gtk_check_version(), but still get loaded
-into an application using a newer version of GTK+.
+Parses a file containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="required_major">
-<parameter_description> the required major version.
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="required_minor">
-<parameter_description> the required minor version.
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the name of the file to parse
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="required_micro">
-<parameter_description> the required micro version.
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %NULL if the GTK+ library is compatible with the
-given version, or a string describing the version mismatch.
-The returned string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified
-or freed.
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -28402,76 +28789,73 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_table_free">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_default">
<description>
-This function frees a target table as returned by
-gtk_target_table_new_from_list()
+Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
+gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetEntry array
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries in the array
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
+the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
+the screen and can be used as long as the screen
+is open. Do not ref or unref it.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
<description>
-Creates a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> of the merged UI.
-
+Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
+for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the tab label widget to use, or %NULL for default tab
+label.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of
-the merged UI.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start">
<description>
-Sets the page forwarding function to be @page_func, this function will
-be used to determine what will be the next page when the user presses
-the forward button. Setting @page_func to %NULL will make the assistant
-to use the default forward function, which just goes to the next visible
-page.
+Moves the given @iter backward to the next display line start.
+A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
+separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
+Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
+wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
+same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_func">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAssistantPageFunc, or %NULL to use the default one
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @page_func
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @data
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_selection_get_select_multiple">
@@ -28507,6 +28891,28 @@ Return value: The user data.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
+<description>
+Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
+is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
+multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="enable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable rubber banding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_size_entry">
<description>
This returns the #GtkEntry used to allow the user to edit the font
@@ -28543,14 +28949,30 @@ each instance of the object so that the delegate object can be found.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToolShell">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_rich_text">
<description>
-Dummy structure for accessing instances of #GtkToolShellIface.
+Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
+determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide rich text.
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
+and a suitable target for rich text is included,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_starts_display_line">
@@ -28719,6 +29141,35 @@ direction has not been explicitly set by gtk_widget_set_direction().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_has_window">
+<description>
+Specifies whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. Note that
+all realized widgets have a non-%NULL "window" pointer
+(gtk_widget_get_window() never returns a %NULL window when a widget
+is realized), but for many of them it's actually the #GdkWindow of
+one of its parent widgets. Widgets that create a %window for
+themselves in GtkWidget::realize() however must announce this by
+calling this function with @has_window = %TRUE.
+
+This function should only be called by widget implementations,
+and they should call it in their init() function.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_window">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @widget has a window.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_path_prepend_index">
<description>
Prepends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
@@ -28770,19 +29221,25 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_free">
+<function name="gtk_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Frees a dynamically-allocated icon source, along with its
-filename, size, and pixbuf fields if those are not %NULL.
+Creates a new #GtkButton containing the image and text from a stock item.
+Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK and
+#GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
+
+If @stock_id is unknown, then it will be treated as a mnemonic
+label (as for gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic()).
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkButton
+</return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_icon_cache_validate">
@@ -28807,20 +29264,45 @@ be controlled with the @flags field.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_buffer">
<description>
-Returns: the wrap width.
+Get the #GtkEntryBuffer object which holds the text for
+this widget.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the wrap width.
+<return> A #GtkEntryBuffer object.
+</return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.6
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
+<description>
+A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
+ rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
+Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
+is less than the second character in the buffer.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="lhs">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rhs">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
</return>
</function>
@@ -28981,82 +29463,65 @@ page in the notebook
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkStatusbar">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color">
<description>
-Is emitted whenever a new message is popped off a statusbar's stack.
+Fills @color in with the original color value.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="statusbar">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> the context id of the relevant message/statusbar.
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the message that was just popped.
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the original color value.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_list_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
<description>
-Appends the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list. All targets are added with the same @info.
+Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
+to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
+automatically determine a suitable item size.
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
+<parameter name="item_width">
+<parameter_description> the width for each item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags_by_name">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_move_mark_onscreen">
<description>
-Same as gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags(), but allows you
-to pass in tag names instead of tag objects.
+Moves a mark within the buffer so that it's
+located within the currently-visible text area.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> position in @buffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> UTF-8 text
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> length of @text, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_tag_name">
-<parameter_description> name of a tag to apply to @text
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> more tag names
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the mark moved (wasn't already onscreen)
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify">
@@ -29075,25 +29540,22 @@ emitted.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_set">
<description>
-Sets whether the preview widget set by
-gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() should be shown for the
-current filename. When @active is set to false, the file chooser
-may display an internally generated preview of the current file
-or it may display no preview at all. See
-gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() for more details.
-
-Since: 2.4
+See gtk_image_new_from_icon_set() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="active">
-<parameter_description> whether to display the user-specified preview widget
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -29119,21 +29581,31 @@ it is used internally by #GtkTreeView.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area">
<description>
-Return value: A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
+Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
+to be @rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for
+properly setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView rows and cells, #GtkIconViews,
+etc.
+
+For setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView, please refer to the convenience
+functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and
+gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rect">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_paper_size">
@@ -29268,44 +29740,18 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_begin_resize_drag">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
<description>
-Starts resizing a window. This function is used if an application
-has window resizing controls. When GDK can support it, the resize
-will be done using the standard mechanism for the <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> or windowing
-system. Otherwise, GDK will try to emulate window resizing,
-potentially not all that well, depending on the windowing system.
+Creates a new ui manager object.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> mouse button that initiated the drag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="edge">
-<parameter_description> position of the resize control
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_x">
-<parameter_description> X position where the user clicked to initiate the drag, in root window coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_y">
-<parameter_description> Y position where the user clicked to initiate the drag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="timestamp">
-<parameter_description> timestamp from the click event that initiated the drag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new ui manager object.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_documenters">
@@ -29360,25 +29806,28 @@ used to be useful before gdk_colormap_get_visual() existed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_embed_set_delegate">
+<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_new_with_stock_from_widget">
<description>
-Establishes that calls on @receiver for #GtkFileChooser methods should be
-delegated to @delegate, and that #GtkFileChooser signals emitted on @delegate
-should be forwarded to @receiver. Must be used in conjunction with
-_gtk_file_chooser_embed_delegate_iface_init().
+Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton adding it to the same group as @group.
+The new #GtkRadioToolButton will contain an icon and label from the
+stock item indicated by @stock_id.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="receiver">
-<parameter_description> a GOobject implementing #GtkFileChooserEmbed
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioToolButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="delegate">
-<parameter_description> another GObject implementing #GtkFileChooserEmbed
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of a stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkRadioToolButton
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_file_part">
@@ -29602,16 +30051,25 @@ edge of the line.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_new">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
<description>
-Creates a new toolbar.
-
+Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
+then the old model is unset. The sort function is unset as a result
+of this call. The model will be in an unsorted state until a sort
+function is set.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModelSort.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly-created toolbar.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name">
@@ -29778,6 +30236,20 @@ Moves a current child of @layout to a new position.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_error_quark">
+<description>
+Registers an error quark for #GtkPrintOperation if necessary.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> The error quark used for #GtkPrintOperation errors.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text">
<description>
Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
@@ -29888,24 +30360,23 @@ Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_box_pack_end()
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
+<function name="gtk_statusbar_pop">
<description>
-Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
+Removes the first message in the #GtkStatusBar's stack
+with the given context id.
-Since: 2.10
+Note that this may not change the displayed message, if
+the message at the top of the stack has a different
+context id.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> the function to call
+<parameter name="statusbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @func
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> a context identifier
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -29964,29 +30435,23 @@ Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_table_new_from_list">
+<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_show_folders">
<description>
-This function creates an #GtkTargetEntry array that contains the
-same targets as the passed %list. The returned table is newly
-allocated and should be freed using gtk_target_table_free() when no
-longer needed.
-
+Sets whether folders should be included in the #GtkTreeModel for
+display.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> return location for the number ot targets in the table
+<parameter name="show_folders">
+<parameter_description> whether folders should be displayed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new table.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_size">
@@ -30068,33 +30533,19 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_items_ac">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_set_preview_text">
<description>
-Creates the menu items from the @entries.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
+The @text is used to show how the selected font looks.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the length of @entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> data passed to the callback functions of all entries
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_type">
-<parameter_description> 1 if the callback functions in @entries are of type
-#GtkItemFactoryCallback1, 2 if they are of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback2
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30312,23 +30763,22 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_target">
<description>
-Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
+Retrieves the target of the selection.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_opacity">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the target of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_iter_is_selected">
@@ -30367,26 +30817,38 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
<description>
-Moves forward to the next visible word end. (If @iter is currently on a
-word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
-are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
-language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
-algorithms).
+Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
+is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
+unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
+scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
+gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
+The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
+the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
+This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
+for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
+the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
+widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
+#GtkViewport proxy.
+
+A widget supports scrolling natively if the
+set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
+i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_value">
@@ -30488,22 +30950,25 @@ Deprecated: Use gtk_entry_set_max_length() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_popup_data">
+<function name="gtk_style_lookup_icon_set">
<description>
-Obtains the @popup_data which was passed to
-gtk_item_factory_popup_with_data(). This data is available until the menu
-is popped down again.
+Looks up @stock_id in the icon factories associated with @style
+and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
+otherwise %NULL.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @popup_data associated with @ifactory
+<return> icon set of @stock_id
</return>
</function>
@@ -30671,17 +31136,14 @@ used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
<function name="GtkRecentManager">
<description>
-Emitted when the current recently used resources manager changes its
-contents.
+Whether this #GtkRecentChooser should display recently used resources
+marked with the "private" flag. Such resources should be considered
+private to the applications and groups that have added them.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="recent_manager">
-<parameter_description> the recent manager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -30729,19 +31191,44 @@ array must be freed with g_free().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_cut_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_orientation">
<description>
-Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
-puts it on the clipboard.
+Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page orientation
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_to_tag_toggle">
+<description>
+Moves backward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
+#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
+ tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
+Return value: whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_font">
@@ -31127,27 +31614,29 @@ or %NULL if the mark is deleted.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_image">
+<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
<description>
-Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
-it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
-image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
-gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
+Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
+in a RC file.
+
+Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
+order to support symbolic colors.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+<parameter name="scanner">
+<parameter_description> a #GScanner
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the button
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
+that was expected but not found
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_cursor_visible">
@@ -31166,20 +31655,59 @@ shown, even if the text is editable.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_reparse_all">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
<description>
-If the modification time on any previously read file for the
-default #GtkSettings has changed, discard all style information
-and then reread all previously read RC files.
+Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
+The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned #GIcon.
+
+If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the files were reread.
+<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_direction">
+<description>
+Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
+controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
+and also the direction in which the children of a container are
+packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
+so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
+reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
+let the default reading direction present, except for containers
+where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitely
+visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
+
+If the direction is set to %GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value
+set by gtk_widget_set_default_direction() will be used.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dir">
+<parameter_description> the new direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action">
<description>
Should be paired with a call to gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action().
@@ -31227,26 +31755,26 @@ the anchor, so you can unref it after insertion.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_changed">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() @count times (or until
-gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
-negative, moves backward instead of forward.
-
+Emits the "row-changed" signal on @tree_model.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of sentences to move
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath pointing to the changed row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the changed row
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face">
@@ -31356,26 +31884,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts">
-<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of times to move
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_pixbuf">
<description>
Gets the #GdkPixbuf being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
@@ -31461,32 +31969,28 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
-underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
-gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
-return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
-empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
-
-Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
-2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
-underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
-be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
-widget.
+Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
+displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
+will be updated appropriately.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
-by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
+<return> a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -31544,19 +32048,18 @@ result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_buffer">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_next">
<description>
-Return value: the buffer
+Moves the @path to point to the next node at the current depth.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the buffer
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_page_ranges">
@@ -31617,26 +32120,44 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines">
<description>
-Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
-
+Sets the default number of pixels of blank space
+to put below paragraphs in @text_view. May be overridden
+by tags applied to @text_view's buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="pixels_below_lines">
+<parameter_description> pixels below paragraphs
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default bottom margin
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
+<description>
+Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
+gtk_style_lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example,
+gtk_image_new_from_stock() will be able to find icons in @factory.
+There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
+application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
+can be overridden by themes.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="factory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_label">
@@ -31844,6 +32365,9 @@ This function is often followed by @gtk_widget_grab_focus (@tree_view)
in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing
can only happen when the widget is realized.
+If @path is invalid for @model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset
+and the function will return without failing.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tree_view">
@@ -32026,6 +32550,8 @@ user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="chooser">
@@ -32125,21 +32651,22 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_snap_edge">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_filename">
<description>
-Gets the edge used for determining reattachment of the handle box. See
-gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge().
+Retrieves the source filename, or %NULL if none is set. The
+filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
+persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="handle_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the edge used for determining reattachment, or (GtkPositionType)-1 if this
-is determined (as per default) from the handle position.
+<return> image filename. This string must not be modified
+or freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -32214,33 +32741,66 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_plug_construct_for_display">
+<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
<description>
-Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
- socket_id which is currently displayed on @display.
-This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
+This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
+#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's
-#GtkSocket.
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_id">
-<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
+no action should be activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="on_change">
+<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_selection_mode">
+<description>
+Gets the selection mode of the @icon_view.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current selection mode
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_new_text">
<description>
Convenience function which constructs a new text combo box, which is a
@@ -32498,25 +33058,6 @@ Look up a named tag.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_filename">
-<description>
-Retrieves the source filename, or %NULL if none is set. The
-filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
-persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> image filename. This string must not be modified
-or freed.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect">
<description>
Removes an accelerator previously installed through
@@ -32578,24 +33119,28 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_deleted">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
<description>
-Determines whether a child anchor has been deleted from
-the buffer. Keep in mind that the child anchor will be
-unreferenced when removed from the buffer, so you need to
-hold your own reference (with g_object_ref()) if you plan
-to use this function — otherwise all deleted child anchors
-will also be finalized.
+Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
+no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
+pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextChildAnchor
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the child anchor has been deleted from its buffer
+<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
+wasn't set from a stock id
+
+Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -32630,17 +33175,30 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkWidget">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_find">
<description>
-The "scroll-arrow-vlength" style property defines the length of
-vertical scroll arrows.
+Finds the first entry in an accelerator group for which
+ find_func returns %TRUE and returns its #GtkAccelKey.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="find_func">
+<parameter_description> a function to filter the entries of @accel_group with
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @find_func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the key of the first entry passing @find_func. The key is
+owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="GtkNotebook">
@@ -32714,57 +33272,48 @@ the preedit string should not be included within
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_default">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_remove_item">
<description>
-Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
-gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
+Removes a resource pointed by @uri from the recently used resources
+list handled by a recent manager.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI of the item you wish to remove
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
-the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
-the screen and can be used as long as the screen
-is open. Do not ref or unref it.
+<return> %TRUE if the item pointed by @uri has been successfully
+removed by the recently used resources list, and %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_set_preview_text">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_load_scanner">
<description>
-Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
-The @text is used to show how the selected font looks.
+#GScanner variant of gtk_accel_map_load().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fontsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
+<parameter name="scanner">
+<parameter_description> a #GScanner which has already been provided with an input file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_new">
-<description>
-Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_drag_dest_row">
<description>
Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
@@ -32809,21 +33358,21 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_out">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Notify the input method that the widget to which this
-input context corresponds has lost focus. The input method
-may, for example, change the displayed feedback or reset the contexts
-state to reflect this change.
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the horizontal aspect.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
+used.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_local_only">
@@ -32983,6 +33532,26 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_has_focus">
+<description>
+Determines if the widget has the global input focus. See
+gtk_widget_is_focus() for the difference between having the global
+input focus, and only having the focus within a toplevel.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget has the global input focus.
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkImage displaying @pixbuf.
@@ -33043,58 +33612,92 @@ See gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
<description>
-If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
-gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner(), and the gtk_clipboard_set_with_data() or
-gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
-by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
-
+Return value: The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the owner of the clipboard, if any; otherwise %NULL.
+<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
+overflow menu for @tool_item.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_display_name">
+<function name="gtk_ruler_get_range">
<description>
-Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
-
+Retrieves values indicating the range and current position of a #GtkRuler.
+See gtk_ruler_set_range().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="ruler">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="lower">
+<parameter_description> location to store lower limit of the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="upper">
+<parameter_description> location to store upper limit of the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> location to store the current position of the mark on the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating
+the space to leave for the text, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the human-readable name of @size
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.10
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_focus">
+<description>
+Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its
+toplevel. (This does not mean that the %HAS_FOCUS flag is
+necessarily set; %HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the
+toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_to_path">
+<function name="gtk_misc_get_alignment">
<description>
-Expands the row at @path. This will also expand all parent rows of
- path as necessary.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Gets the X and Y alignment of the widget within its allocation.
+See gtk_misc_set_alignment().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="misc">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path to a row.
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> location to store Y alignment of @misc, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33144,30 +33747,21 @@ range of columns.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start">
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_length">
<description>
-Moves the given @iter backward to the next display line start.
-A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
-separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
-Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
-wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
-same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
-views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
+Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+<return> The number of characters in the buffer.
+
+Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -33206,29 +33800,18 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line">
<description>
-Retrieves the image used for the icon.
-
-Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
-method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
-#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
-
+Return value: number of characters in the line
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
-
-Since: 2.16
+<return> number of characters in the line
</return>
</function>
@@ -33301,6 +33884,28 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_margin">
+<description>
+Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
+which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
+of the icon view.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="margin">
+<parameter_description> the margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_vscale_new_with_range">
<description>
Creates a new vertical scale widget that lets the user input a
@@ -33425,21 +34030,25 @@ toplevel container is realized and mapped.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_completion">
+<function name="gtk_menu_set_reserve_toggle_size">
<description>
-Return value: The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
+Sets whether the menu should reserve space for drawing toggles
+or icons, regardless of their actual presence.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reserve_toggle_size">
+<parameter_description> whether to reserve size for toggles
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_add_item">
@@ -33473,6 +34082,58 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
+<description>
+Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
+Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
+followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
+words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
+from the last added.
+
+The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
+numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
+the length of the sequence should be zero.)
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context_simple">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> the table
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_seq_len">
+<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
+(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_seqs">
+<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_menu_get_reserve_toggle_size">
+<description>
+Returns: Whether the menu reserves toggle space
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Whether the menu reserves toggle space
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_selection_get_selections">
<description>
Retrieves the list of file selections the user has made in the dialog box.
@@ -33593,6 +34254,25 @@ convert to window coordinates with gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_bytes">
+<description>
+Retrieves the length in bytes of the buffer.
+See gtk_entry_buffer_get_length().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The byte length of the buffer.
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_label_get_single_line_mode">
<description>
Return value: %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
@@ -33912,31 +34592,16 @@ automatically, or explicitly using gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_lock_path">
+<function name="GtkAction">
<description>
-Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn't yet contain
-an entry for @accel_path, a new one is created.
-
-Locking an accelerator path prevents its accelerator from being changed
-during runtime. A locked accelerator path can be unlocked by
-gtk_accel_map_unlock_path(). Refer to gtk_accel_map_change_entry()
-for information about runtime accelerator changes.
-
-If called more than once, @accel_path remains locked until
-gtk_accel_map_unlock_path() has been called an equivalent number
-of times.
-
-Note that locking of individual accelerator paths is independent from
-locking the #GtkAccelGroup containing them. For runtime accelerator
-changes to be possible both the accelerator path and its #GtkAccelGroup
-have to be unlocked.
+The "activate" signal is emitted when the action is activated.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33973,70 +34638,92 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_stock">
+<function name="gtk_builder_get_object">
<description>
-Gets the id of the stock icon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
-The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_STOCK (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
-The returned string is owned by the #GtkStatusIcon and should not
-be freed or modified.
+Gets the object named @name. Note that this function does not
+increment the reference count of the returned object.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of object to get
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> stock id of the displayed stock icon,
-or %NULL if the image is empty.
+<return> the object named @name or %NULL if it could not be
+found in the object tree.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_paper_sizes">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_stock">
<description>
-Creates a list of known paper sizes.
+Gets the id of the stock icon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
+The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_STOCK (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
+The returned string is owned by the #GtkStatusIcon and should not
+be freed or modified.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="include_custom">
-<parameter_description> whether to include custom paper sizes
-as defined in the page setup dialog
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated list of newly
-allocated #GtkPaperSize objects
+<return> stock id of the displayed stock icon,
+or %NULL if the image is empty.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_scroll_to_path">
<description>
-If set, an underline in the label property indicates that the next character
-should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu. For
-example, if the label property is "_Open" and @use_underline is %TRUE,
-the label on the tool button will be "Open" and the item on the overflow
-menu will have an underlined 'O'.
+Moves the alignments of @icon_view to the position specified by @path.
+ row_align determines where the row is placed, and @col_align determines
+where @column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0.
+0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means
+center.
-Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property
-only affects the menu item on the overflow menu.
+If @use_align is %FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the
+tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen.
+This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current
+position. If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.
-Since: 2.4
+This function only works if the model is set, and @path is a valid row on
+the model. If the model changes before the @icon_view is realized, the
+centered path will be modified to reflect this change.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_underline">
-<parameter_description> whether the button label has the form "_Open"
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The path of the item to move to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_align">
+<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments, or %FALSE.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="row_align">
+<parameter_description> The vertical alignment of the item specified by @path.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="col_align">
+<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment of the item specified by @path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -34116,24 +34803,39 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_uri_targets">
+<function name="gtk_test_display_button_window">
<description>
-Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag source. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
-gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Create a window with window title @window_title, text contents @dialog_text,
+and a number of buttons, according to the paired argument list given
+as @... parameters.
+Each button is created with a @label and a ::clicked signal handler that
+incremrents the integer stored in @nump.
+The window will be automatically shown with gtk_widget_show_now() after
+creation, so when this function returns it has already been mapped,
+resized and positioned on screen.
+The window will quit any running gtk_main()-loop when destroyed, and it
+will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter name="window_title">
+<parameter_description> Title of the window to be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dialog_text">
+<parameter_description> Text inside the window to be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> %NULL terminated list of (const char *label, int *nump) pairs.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a widget pointer to the newly created GtkWindow.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_child_get">
@@ -34163,21 +34865,20 @@ optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_is_important">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_extension_events">
<description>
-Checks whether @action is important or not
+Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive; see
+gdk_input_set_extension_events().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is important
-
-Since: 2.16
+<return> extension events for @widget
</return>
</function>
@@ -34251,27 +34952,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_set_menu">
-<description>
-Sets the #GtkMenu that is popped up when the user clicks on the arrow.
-If @menu is NULL, the arrow button becomes insensitive.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkMenu associated with #GtkMenuToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_from_indices">
<description>
Creates a new path with @first_index and @varargs as indices.
@@ -34412,6 +35092,24 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
+<description>
+Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+used, or -1 if this is disabled.
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_get_inconsistent">
<description>
Retrieves the value set by gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent().
@@ -34533,6 +35231,27 @@ will not "adopt" it.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_expander_set_use_underline">
+<description>
+If true, an underline in the text of the expander label indicates
+the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_underline">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered">
<description>
Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
@@ -34668,23 +35387,6 @@ Creates a new #GtkTreePath. The string representation of this path is "0&q
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
-<description>
-Return value: the location of @printer
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the location of @printer
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_class_install_style_property">
<description>
Installs a style property on a widget class. The parser for the
@@ -34815,25 +35517,20 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_size">
+<function name="gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets">
<description>
-Sets the icon size this icon source is intended to be used
-with.
-
-Setting the icon size on an icon source makes no difference
-if the size is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
-call gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it
-in addition to calling this function.
+Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag destination. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
+gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> icon size this source applies to
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -34938,19 +35635,31 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_viewport_get_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column">
<description>
-Return value: the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
+Convenience function for setting up the most used case of this code: a
+completion list with just strings. This function will set up @completion
+to have a list displaying all (and just) strings in the completion list,
+and to get those strings from @column in the model of @completion.
+
+This functions creates and adds a #GtkCellRendererText for the selected
+column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell
+renderer, use g_object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="viewport">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path">
@@ -35029,6 +35738,33 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_set_text">
+<description>
+Sets the contents of the selection from a UTF-8 encoded string.
+The string is converted to the form determined by
+ selection_data->target.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> a UTF-8 string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> the length of @str, or -1 if @str is nul-terminated.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_is_end">
<description>
Return value: whether @iter is the end iterator
@@ -35044,20 +35780,25 @@ Return value: whether @iter is the end iterator
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function">
+<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable">
<description>
-Return value: The function.
+Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as
+the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement
+this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+<parameter name="drag_source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> row on which user is initiating a drag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The function.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> %TRUE if the row can be dragged
</return>
</function>
@@ -35208,20 +35949,25 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vscrollbar_new">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_tree_lines">
<description>
-Creates a new vertical scrollbar.
+Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @tree_view.
+This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="enabled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable tree line drawing, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkVScrollbar
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_documenters">
@@ -35243,29 +35989,6 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_group">
-<description>
-Checks whether @group_name appears inside the groups registered for the
-recently used item @info.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> name of a group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the group was found.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_to_file">
<description>
This function saves the print settings from @settings to @file_name.
@@ -35466,31 +36189,25 @@ in which case nothing will be sent
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
<description>
-Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
-to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
-activates that accelerator.
+Registers @alias as another name for @target.
+So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
+will return @target.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
-to activate the accelerator.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
+<parameter name="alias">
+<parameter_description> an alias for @target
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> an existing icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_orientation">
@@ -35534,28 +36251,6 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_copy_target_list">
-<description>
-This function returns the list of targets this text buffer can
-provide for copying and as DND source. The targets in the list are
-added with %info values from the #GtkTextBufferTargetInfo enum,
-using gtk_target_list_add_rich_text_targets() and
-gtk_target_list_add_text_targets().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkTargetList
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_hide_all">
<description>
Recursively hides a widget and any child widgets.
@@ -35570,58 +36265,46 @@ Recursively hides a widget and any child widgets.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file
+This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
+The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
+reused for future invocations of this function.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
-to use the default name "Page Setup"
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
<description>
-A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
- rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
-Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
-is less than the second character in the buffer.
-
+Returns: the wrap width.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="lhs">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rhs">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
+<return> the wrap width.
+
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -35669,33 +36352,46 @@ If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line_offset">
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
<description>
-Obtains an iterator pointing to @char_offset within the given
-line. The @char_offset must exist, offsets off the end of the line
-are not allowed. Note <emphasis>characters</emphasis>, not bytes;
-UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
+Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
+them with the current contents of @builder.
+
+<note><para>
+If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
+its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
+#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
+</para></note>
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter_description> the string to parse
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="line_number">
-<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
+<parameter name="object_ids">
+<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="char_offset">
-<parameter_description> char offset from start of line
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio">
@@ -35887,7 +36583,7 @@ Looks up the icon size associated with @name.
<function name="_gtk_clipboard_handle_event">
<description>
-Emits the ::owner-change signal on the appropriate @clipboard.
+Emits the #GtkClipboard::owner-change signal on the appropriate @clipboard.
Since: 2.6
@@ -35986,21 +36682,39 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_default_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
<description>
-Returns: the default page setup
+Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
+the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
+managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
+frame, or display it in other contexts.
+
+The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
+drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
+GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
+final size is known, to allow best quality.
+
+If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
+gtk_window_set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.
+
+This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon_list()
+with a 1-element list.
+
+See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
+for all windows in your application in one go.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> icon image, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default page setup
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_get_info">
@@ -36033,6 +36747,26 @@ return value will be NULL.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_visible">
+<description>
+Sets the cell renderer's visibility.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible">
+<parameter_description> the visibility of the cell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_displayed_row">
<description>
Sets the row of the model that is currently displayed
@@ -36176,6 +36910,39 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_delete_text">
+<description>
+Deletes a sequence of characters from the buffer. @n_chars characters are
+deleted starting at @position. If @n_chars is negative, then all characters
+until the end of the text are deleted.
+
+If @position or @n_chars are out of bounds, then they are coerced to sane
+values.
+
+Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> position at which to delete text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> number of characters to delete
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The number of characters deleted.
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_path_up">
<description>
Moves the @path to point to its parent node, if it has a parent.
@@ -36207,48 +36974,14 @@ Return value: list of #GtkTextMark
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_value">
+<function name="GtkMenuItem">
<description>
-Initializes and sets @value to that at @column.
-When done with @value, g_value_unset() needs to be called
-to free any allocated memory.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The column to lookup the value at.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> An empty #GValue to set.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+The minimum desired width of the menu item in characters.
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color">
-<description>
-Fills @color in with the original color value.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the original color value.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -36446,19 +37179,77 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_line">
+<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
<description>
-Return value: whether @iter is at the end of a line
+Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_text">
+<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
+graphics context of @style
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> the layout to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter is at the end of a line
-</return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_target_list_add_text_targets">
+<description>
+Appends the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list. All targets are added with the same @info.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_cursor_visible">
@@ -36595,24 +37386,6 @@ The function updates @position to point after the newly inserted text.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_list_actions">
-<description>
-Lists the actions in the action group.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an allocated list of the action objects in the action group
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted">
<description>
Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
@@ -36774,28 +37547,65 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_text">
+<function name="_gtk_socket_end_embedding">
<description>
-Requests the contents of the clipboard as text and converts
-the result to UTF-8 if necessary. This function waits for
-the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
-timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
+ socket: a #GtkSocket
+Called to end the embedding of a plug in the socket.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active">
+<description>
+Sets whether the preview widget set by
+gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() should be shown for the
+current filename. When @active is set to false, the file chooser
+may display an internally generated preview of the current file
+or it may display no preview at all. See
+gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() for more details.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="active">
+<parameter_description> whether to display the user-specified preview widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated UTF-8 string which must
-be freed with g_free(), or %NULL if retrieving
-the selection data failed. (This could happen
-for various reasons, in particular if the
-clipboard was empty or if the contents of the
-clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
-</return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
+<description>
+Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="margin">
+<parameter_description> the new bottom margin in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the units for @margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_newv">
@@ -36843,6 +37653,27 @@ binding on @object.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_embed_set_delegate">
+<description>
+Establishes that calls on @receiver for #GtkFileChooser methods should be
+delegated to @delegate, and that #GtkFileChooser signals emitted on @delegate
+should be forwarded to @receiver. Must be used in conjunction with
+_gtk_file_chooser_embed_delegate_iface_init().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="receiver">
+<parameter_description> a GOobject implementing #GtkFileChooserEmbed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="delegate">
+<parameter_description> another GObject implementing #GtkFileChooserEmbed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_spin_button_spin">
<description>
Increment or decrement a spin button's value in a specified direction
@@ -36918,6 +37749,27 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs">
+<description>
+Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
+menu item.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to add tearoff menu items
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_action">
<description>
Sets action which is performed by the file selector using this entry.
@@ -36951,32 +37803,27 @@ Claims focus for the socket. XXX send_event?
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_render_page">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_side_image">
<description>
-Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
-was passed to the #GtkPrintOperation::preview handler together
-with @preview.
-
-A custom iprint preview should use this function in its ::expose
-handler to render the currently selected page.
-
-Note that this function requires a suitable cairo context to
-be associated with the print context.
+Gets the header image for @page.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="preview">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperationPreview
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_nr">
-<parameter_description> the page to render
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the side image for @page, or %NULL
+if there's no side image for the page.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_target_list">
@@ -37036,42 +37883,28 @@ itself, excluding surrounding borders and the tree expander area.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
<description>
-Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
-in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
-invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
-match those of this connection.
-
-The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
+Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
+position in @entry.
-Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
-connected to one accelerator group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_flags">
-<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="closure">
-<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> the icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
+with g_free() when done.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
</function>
<function name="GtkClipboard">
@@ -37132,6 +37965,26 @@ gtk_container_set_border_width().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_double_buffered">
+<description>
+Determines whether the widget is double buffered.
+
+See gtk_widget_set_double_buffered()
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is double buffered
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_all">
<description>
Recursively expands all nodes in the @tree_view.
@@ -37158,6 +38011,28 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_frame_get_label">
+<description>
+If the frame's label widget is a #GtkLabel, returns the
+text in the label widget. (The frame will have a #GtkLabel
+for the label widget if a non-%NULL argument was passed
+to gtk_frame_new().)
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="frame">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFrame
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the text in the label, or %NULL if there
+was no label widget or the lable widget was not
+a #GtkLabel. This string is owned by GTK+ and
+must not be modified or freed.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_button_get_alpha">
<description>
Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
@@ -37194,44 +38069,50 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_get_active">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_query_tab_label_packing">
<description>
-Queries a #GtkToggleToolButton and returns its current state.
-Return value: %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
+Query the packing attributes for the tab label of the page
+containing @child.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleToolButton
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> location to store the expand value (or NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> location to store the fill value (or NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pack_type">
+<parameter_description> location to store the pack_type (or NULL)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_line_end">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_cursor_visible">
<description>
-Moves the iterator to point to the paragraph delimiter characters,
-which will be either a newline, a carriage return, a carriage
-return/newline in sequence, or the Unicode paragraph separator
-character. If the iterator is already at the paragraph delimiter
-characters, moves to the paragraph delimiter characters for the
-next line. If @iter is on the last line in the buffer, which does
-not end in paragraph delimiters, moves to the end iterator (end of
-the last line), and returns %FALSE.
+Find out whether the cursor is being displayed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new location is not the end iterator
+<return> whether the insertion mark is visible
</return>
</function>
@@ -37253,29 +38134,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_filter">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_focus">
<description>
-Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
-filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
-is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
-in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
-filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
-set of files without letting the user change it.
+Determines whether @widget can own the input focus. See
+gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_activates_default">
@@ -37382,32 +38257,6 @@ Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_search(), but moves backward.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_type_hint">
-<description>
-By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
-manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
-suitable to the function of the window in your application.
-
-This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
-
-gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience functions in GTK+
-will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hint">
-<parameter_description> the window type
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_set_context_id">
<description>
Sets the context id for @context.
@@ -37463,20 +38312,20 @@ negative.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_has_selection">
<description>
-Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag source. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
-gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Sets whether a selection exists.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE indicates that a selection exists
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -37525,20 +38374,15 @@ the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_ps">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_new">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
+Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -37628,19 +38472,28 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accessible_connect_widget_destroyed">
+<function name="gtk_recent_filter_get_needed">
<description>
-This function specifies the callback function to be called when the widget
-corresponding to a GtkAccessible is destroyed.
+Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
+passed to gtk_recent_filter_filter()
+
+This function will not typically be used by applications; it
+is intended principally for use in the implementation of
+#GtkRecentChooser.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accessible">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccessible
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
+calling gtk_recent_filter_filter()
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_target_list_unref">
@@ -37808,55 +38661,27 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_polygon">
+<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
<description>
-Draws a polygon on @window with the given parameters.
+An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
+changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
+adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
+the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="points">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint<!-- -->s
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_points">
-<parameter_description> length of @points
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the polygon should be filled
+<parameter name="hsv">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
+since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
+the color value status to be final.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_tag_set_priority">
@@ -37887,26 +38712,38 @@ automatically.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_hide_on_delete">
+<function name="GtkFileChooserButton">
<description>
-Utility function; intended to be connected to the #GtkWidget::delete-event
-signal on a #GtkWindow. The function calls gtk_widget_hide() on its
-argument, then returns %TRUE. If connected to ::delete-event, the
-result is that clicking the close button for a window (on the
-window frame, top right corner usually) will hide but not destroy
-the window. By default, GTK+ destroys windows when ::delete-event
-is received.
+The width of the entry and label inside the button, in characters.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_range_set_show_fill_level">
+<description>
+Sets whether a graphical fill level is show on the trough. See
+gtk_range_set_fill_level() for a general description of the fill
+level concept.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_fill_level">
+<parameter_description> Whether a fill level indicator graphics is shown.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_reparent">
@@ -38088,6 +38925,38 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkCellRenderer">
+<description>
+This signal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.
+The indended use of this signal is to do special setup
+on @editable, e.g. adding a #GtkEntryCompletion or setting
+up additional columns in a #GtkComboBox.
+
+Note that GTK+ doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will
+continue to use the same kind of widget for editing in future
+releases, therefore you should check the type of @editable
+before doing any specific setup, as in the following example:
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="renderer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the path identifying the edited cell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_info_bar_add_action_widget">
<description>
Add an activatable widget to the action area of a #GtkInfoBar,
@@ -38159,40 +39028,18 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
<description>
-Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
-label in the popup menu.
-
+Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
-menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
-is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
-a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
-If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
-specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_fixed_get_has_window">
@@ -38274,23 +39121,39 @@ Alters the view of @toolbar to display either icons only, text only, or both.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_completion">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_widget">
<description>
-Sets @completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with @entry.
-All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
- completion using the #GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
- completion is set to %NULL.
+Sets the widget in the header to be @widget. If widget is %NULL, then the
+header button is set with a #GtkLabel set to the title of @tree_column.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> A child #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_visible_horizontal">
+<description>
+Sets whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletion or %NULL
+<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
+<parameter_description> Whether @tool_item is visible when in horizontal mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -38351,20 +39214,21 @@ be used instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_set_editable">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step">
<description>
-Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
-widget or not.
+Sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress
+bouncing block for each call to gtk_entry_progress_pulse().
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_editable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text
-in the widget
+<parameter name="fraction">
+<parameter_description> fraction between 0.0 and 1.0
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -38481,34 +39345,37 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_select_region() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_completion">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
+Get the value in the @spin_button.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
-
-Since: 2.6
+<return> the value of @spin_button
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_error_quark">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_lower">
<description>
-Registers an error quark for #GtkPrintOperation if necessary.
+Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The error quark used for #GtkPrintOperation errors.
+<return> The current minimum value of the adjustment.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -38705,41 +39572,22 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
<description>
-Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
-for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
-information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
-A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
-text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
-is not set.
-
-The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
-#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
-properties.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the dithering that is used
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords">
@@ -38926,6 +39774,24 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_embed_page_setup">
+<description>
+Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::embed-page-setup property.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether there is a selection
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_set_visibility">
<description>
Sets whether the contents of the entry are visible or not.
@@ -39218,17 +40084,15 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_new">
<description>
-Creates a new ui manager object.
-
+Creates a new toolbar.
+
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return> a new ui manager object.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the newly-created toolbar.
</return>
</function>
@@ -39389,6 +40253,46 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_stock_set_translate_func">
+<description>
+Sets a function to be used for translating the @label of
+a stock item.
+
+If no function is registered for a translation domain,
+g_dgettext() is used.
+
+The function is used for all stock items whose
+ translation_domain matches @domain. Note that it is possible
+to use strings different from the actual gettext translation domain
+of your application for this, as long as your #GtkTranslateFunc uses
+the correct domain when calling dgettext(). This can be useful, e.g.
+when dealing with message contexts.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="domain">
+<parameter_description> the translation domain for which @func shall be used
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTranslateFunc
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="notify">
+<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify that is called when @data is
+no longer needed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_row_separator_func">
<description>
Return value: the current row separator function.
@@ -39637,22 +40541,6 @@ Use gtk_drag_source_set_icon_pixbuf() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_get_use_underline">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the button label
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if an embedded underline in the button label
-indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_export_filename">
<description>
Sets up the #GtkPrintOperation to generate a file instead
@@ -39785,20 +40673,31 @@ value changes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_selection">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
+If set, an underline in the label property indicates that the next character
+should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu. For
+example, if the label property is "_Open" and @use_underline is %TRUE,
+the label on the tool button will be "Open" and the item on the overflow
+menu will have an underlined 'O'.
+Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property
+only affects the menu item on the overflow menu.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_underline">
+<parameter_description> whether the button label has the form "_Open"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeSelection object.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_input_shape_combine_mask">
@@ -39831,20 +40730,27 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_extension_events">
+<function name="gtk_image_new_from_animation">
<description>
-Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive; see
-gdk_input_set_extension_events().
+Creates a #GtkImage displaying the given animation.
+The #GtkImage does not assume a reference to the
+animation; you still need to unref it if you own references.
+#GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
+
+Note that the animation frames are shown using a timeout with
+#G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT. When using animations to indicate busyness,
+keep in mind that the animation will only be shown if the main loop
+is not busy with something that has a higher priority.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> an animation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> extension events for @widget
+<return> a new #GtkImage widget
</return>
</function>
@@ -39897,6 +40803,28 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_default">
+<description>
+Specifies whether @widget can be a default widget. See
+gtk_widget_grab_default() for details about the meaning of
+"default".
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="can_default">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @widget can be a default widget.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_top_margin">
<description>
Sets the top margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
@@ -39921,28 +40849,40 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_visible">
<description>
-Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
-area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
-in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
-this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
-using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
-If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return>the cell renderer's visibility.
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_filter">
+<description>
+Sets a callback called for each file/directory to see whether
+it should be included in model. If this function was made
+public, we'd want to include a GDestroyNotify as well.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="mode">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> function to be called for each file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_y">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @filter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40057,6 +40997,30 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length">
+<description>
+Sets the maximum allowed length of the contents of the buffer. If
+the current contents are longer than the given length, then they
+will be truncated to fit.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_length">
+<parameter_description> the maximum length of the entry buffer, or 0 for no maximum.
+(other than the maximum length of entries.) The value passed in will
+be clamped to the range 0-65536.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_key_hash_free">
<description>
Destroys a key hash created with gtk_key_hash_new()
@@ -40105,25 +41069,19 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_frame_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
<description>
-If the frame's label widget is a #GtkLabel, returns the
-text in the label widget. (The frame will have a #GtkLabel
-for the label widget if a non-%NULL argument was passed
-to gtk_frame_new().)
-
+Return value: the modifier mask used to activate
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="frame">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFrame
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text in the label, or %NULL if there
-was no label widget or the lable widget was not
-a #GtkLabel. This string is owned by GTK+ and
-must not be modified or freed.
+<return> the modifier mask used to activate
+mnemonics on this window.
</return>
</function>
@@ -40150,45 +41108,53 @@ or should all have the same requisition in both directions
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_events">
<description>
-Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
-call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
-user-visible operation. The operations between
-gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
-gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating
-an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
-gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
-a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
-"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
-outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
-from other user actions.
+Return value: event mask for @widget
-The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
-gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
-user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
-no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
-single call to one of those functions.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> event mask for @widget
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_ps">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_new">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_display_name">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
+Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
+<return> the human-readable name of @size
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -40227,25 +41193,22 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_path_from_widget">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_y">
<description>
-If @widget has been created by an item factory, returns the full path
-to it. (The full path of a widget is the concatenation of the factory
-path specified in gtk_item_factory_new() with the path specified in the
-#GtkItemFactoryEntry from which the widget was created.)
+Obtains the vertical resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
+in dots per inch.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the full path to @widget if it has been created by an item
-factory, %NULL otherwise. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not be
-modified or freed.
+<return> the vertical resolution of @context
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -40279,19 +41242,23 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_widget">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_completion">
<description>
-Sets the widget in the header to be @widget. If widget is %NULL, then the
-header button is set with a #GtkLabel set to the title of @tree_column.
+Sets @completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with @entry.
+All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
+ completion using the #GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
+ completion is set to %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> A child #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletion or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40323,23 +41290,50 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_get_image_position">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_draw_page_finish">
<description>
-Gets the position of the image relative to the text
-inside the button.
+Signalize that drawing of particular page is complete.
+
+It is called after completion of page drawing (e.g. drawing in another
+thread).
+If gtk_print_operation_set_defer_drawing() was called before, then this function
+has to be called by application. In another case it is called by the library
+itself.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the position
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_padding">
+<description>
+Fills in @xpad and @ypad with the appropriate values of @cell.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpad">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypad">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_reverse">
@@ -40409,43 +41403,39 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_image">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_columns">
<description>
-Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given #GdkPixbuf.
-GTK+ will take responsibility for responding for requests
-for the image, and for converting the image into the
-requested format.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Return value: the number of columns, or -1
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the number of columns, or -1
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_columns">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_x">
<description>
-Return value: the number of columns, or -1
+Obtains the horizontal resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
+in dots per inch.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of columns, or -1
+<return> the horizontal resolution of @context
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -40466,71 +41456,43 @@ reason to use this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
+<function name="gtk_accel_label_set_accel_closure">
<description>
-This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
-Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
-and it automatically generates nicely formatted
-<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
-be terminated after writing out the help output.
-
+Sets the closure to be monitored by this accelerator label. The closure
+must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parameter_string">
-<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
-the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
-<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
-describing the options of your program
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="translation_domain">
-<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
-the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
-with gettext(), or %NULL
+<parameter name="accel_label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a return location for errors
+<parameter name="accel_closure">
+<parameter_description> the closure to monitor for accelerator changes.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_statusbar_pop">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
<description>
-Removes the first message in the #GtkStatusBar's stack
-with the given context id.
+Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
-Note that this may not change the displayed message, if
-the message at the top of the stack has a different
-context id.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="statusbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusBar
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> a context identifier
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> the function to call
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40669,30 +41631,24 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the box is homogeneous.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_list_add">
+<function name="gtk_container_class_list_child_properties">
<description>
-Appends another target to a #GtkTargetList.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> the interned atom representing the target
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> the flags for this target
+<parameter name="cclass">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainerClass
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
+<parameter name="n_properties">
+<parameter_description> location to return the number of child properties found
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*.
+The array must be freed with g_free().
+all child properties of a container class.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="GtkLinkButton">
@@ -40743,6 +41699,27 @@ a #GtkIconFactory.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_socket_get_id">
+<description>
+Gets the window ID of a #GtkSocket widget, which can then
+be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
+instance with gtk_plug_new().
+
+The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
+before you can make this call.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="socket_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the window ID for the socket
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_progress_pulse">
<description>
Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
@@ -41054,32 +42031,20 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_no_show_all">
<description>
-Reads a paper size from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file
-
+Return value: the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the papersize from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name ofthe group in the key file to read,
-or %NULL to read the first group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object with the restored
-paper size, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+<return> the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -41111,21 +42076,24 @@ re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
<description>
-Return value: The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
+Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
+"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
-overflow menu for @tool_item.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -41192,6 +42160,33 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_add_target">
+<description>
+Appends a specified target to the list of supported targets for a
+given widget and selection.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTarget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> the selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> target to add.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> A unsigned integer which will be passed back to the application.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_get_current_event">
<description>
Obtains a copy of the event currently being processed by GTK+. For
@@ -41208,23 +42203,29 @@ If there is no current event, the function returns %NULL.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_show_folders">
+<function name="gtk_target_table_new_from_list">
<description>
-Sets whether folders should be included in the #GtkTreeModel for
-display.
+This function creates an #GtkTargetEntry array that contains the
+same targets as the passed %list. The returned table is newly
+allocated and should be freed using gtk_target_table_free() when no
+longer needed.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_folders">
-<parameter_description> whether folders should be displayed
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> return location for the number ot targets in the table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new table.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_popup_disable">
@@ -41261,29 +42262,42 @@ or make the icon look insensitive/prelighted.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_item">
+<function name="_gtk_text_btree_validate">
<description>
-Obtains the menu item which corresponds to @path.
-
-If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
-submenu, then the item is returned. If you are interested in the submenu,
-use gtk_item_factory_get_widget() instead.
+Validate a single contiguous invalid region of a #GtkTextBTree for
+a given view.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="tree">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBTree
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path to the menu item
+<parameter name="view_id">
+<parameter_description> view id
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_pixels">
+<parameter_description> the maximum number of pixels to validate. (No more
+than one paragraph beyond this limit will be validated)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store starting y coordinate of validated region
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="old_height">
+<parameter_description> location to store old height of validated region
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_height">
+<parameter_description> location to store new height of validated region
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
-lead to a menu item
+<return> %TRUE if a region has been validated, %FALSE if the
+entire tree was already valid.
</return>
</function>
@@ -41368,26 +42382,41 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing">
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_use_underline">
<description>
-Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
-If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the
-#GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.
+Checks if an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
+used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
-This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
-in response to the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal of
-#GtkCellEditable.
-
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="canceled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the editing has been canceled
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if an embedded underline in the label indicates
+the mnemonic accelerator key.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="GtkMenuToolButton">
+<description>
+The ::show-menu signal is emitted before the menu is shown.
+
+It can be used to populate the menu on demand, using
+gtk_menu_tool_button_get_menu().
+
+Note that even if you populate the menu dynamically in this way,
+you must set an empty menu on the #GtkMenuToolButton beforehand,
+since the arrow is made insensitive if the menu is not set.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41458,21 +42487,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToolButton">
-<description>
-This signal is emitted when the tool button is clicked with the mouse
-or activated with the keyboard.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbutton">
-<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_widget">
<description>
Adds a widget to the end of the given toolbar.
@@ -41519,48 +42533,59 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_items_ac">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
+Creates the menu items from the @entries.
-If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators, then pass in
-%NULL for accel_group. Next call gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() with an
-appropriate path for the menu item, use gtk_stock_lookup() to look up the
-standard accelerator for the stock item, and if one is found, call
-gtk_accel_map_add_entry() to register it.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item.
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup to add the menu items accelerator to,
-or %NULL.
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the length of @entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> data passed to the callback functions of all entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_type">
+<parameter_description> 1 if the callback functions in @entries are of type
+#GtkItemFactoryCallback1, 2 if they are of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_widget">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_text_chars">
<description>
-Obtains the item factory from which a widget was created.
+Moves backward by @count text characters (pixbufs, widgets,
+etc. do not count as characters for this). Equivalent to moving
+through the results of gtk_text_iter_get_text (), rather than
+gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of chars to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the item factory from which @widget was created, or %NULL
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
</return>
</function>
@@ -41802,20 +42827,18 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_copy">
+<function name="GtkToggleToolButton">
<description>
-Makes a copy of a #GtkSelectionData structure and its data.
-
+Emitted whenever the toggle tool button changes state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="toggle_tool_button">
+<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a pointer to a copy of @data.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_image">
@@ -41979,20 +43002,34 @@ Set the value of @spin_button.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_style">
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_string">
<description>
-Retrieves whether the toolbar has text, icons, or both . See
-gtk_toolbar_set_style().
-
+Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> the string to parse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current style of @toolbar
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -42182,6 +43219,12 @@ Sets the maximum allowed length of the contents of the widget. If
the current contents are longer than the given length, then they
will be truncated to fit.
+This is equivalent to:
+
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length (gtk_entry_get_buffer (entry), max);
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="entry">
@@ -42217,48 +43260,24 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_hsv_get_metrics">
<description>
-Sets the alignment of the child. This property has no effect unless
-the child is a #GtkMisc or a #GtkAligment.
+Queries the size and ring width of an HSV color selector.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> the horizontal position of the child, 0.0 is left aligned,
-1.0 is right aligned
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> the vertical position of the child, 0.0 is top aligned,
-1.0 is bottom aligned
+<parameter name="hsv">
+<parameter_description> An HSV color selector
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entry">
-<description>
-Deletes the menu item which was created from @entry by the given
-item factory.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> Return value for the diameter of the hue ring
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactoryEntry
+<parameter name="ring_width">
+<parameter_description> Return value for the width of the hue ring
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42391,39 +43410,34 @@ destroyed and when the translation function is changed again
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_alignment_set_padding">
+<function name="gtk_text_mark_new">
<description>
-Sets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
-The padding adds blank space to the sides of the widget. For instance,
-this can be used to indent the child widget towards the right by adding
-padding on the left.
+Creates a text mark. Add it to a buffer using gtk_text_buffer_add_mark().
+If @name is %NULL, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be
+retrieved by name using gtk_text_buffer_get_mark(). If a mark has left
+gravity, and text is inserted at the mark's current location, the mark
+will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has
+right gravity (@left_gravity = %FALSE), the mark will end up on the
+right of newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a
+mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right
+side of the text you're typing).
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="alignment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAlignment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_top">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the top of the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_bottom">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the bottom of the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_left">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the left of the widget
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> mark name or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_right">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the right of the widget.
+<parameter name="left_gravity">
+<parameter_description> whether the mark should have left gravity
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> new #GtkTextMark
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_set">
@@ -42533,21 +43547,32 @@ gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_no_show_all">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_value">
<description>
-Return value: the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
+Initializes and sets @value to that at @column.
+When done with @value, g_value_unset() needs to be called
+to free any allocated memory.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The column to lookup the value at.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> An empty #GValue to set.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paint_resize_grip">
@@ -42715,35 +43740,22 @@ parent of @dest_path doesn't exist, though.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_has_frame">
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_right_justified">
<description>
-(Note: this is a special-purpose function for the framebuffer port,
-that causes GTK+ to draw its own window border. For most applications,
-you want gtk_window_set_decorated() instead, which tells the window
-manager whether to draw the window border.)
-
-If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
-it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
- window->window, accessible in @window->frame. Using the signal
-frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
-
-This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
-windows, but it could conceivably be used by X-programs that
-want to do their own window decorations.
+Gets whether the menu item appears justified at the right
+side of the menu bar.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> a boolean
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the menu item will appear at the
+far right if added to a menu bar.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_set_from_stock">
@@ -42779,24 +43791,6 @@ return value: the directory. (Must be freed with g_free())
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
-<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the dithering that is used
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_foreach">
<description>
Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
@@ -43156,22 +44150,24 @@ Deprecated: 2.18: use gtk_cell_layout_get_cells() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_data_type">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_remove_space">
<description>
-Retrieves the data type of the selection.
+Removes a space from the specified position.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the index of the space to remove.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the data type of the selection.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_socket_add_grabbed_key">
@@ -43243,34 +44239,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag">
-<description>
-Emits the "remove-tag" signal. The default handler for the signal
-removes all occurrences of @tag from the given range. @start and
- end don't have to be in order.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> one bound of range to be untagged
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> other bound of range to be untagged
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_drag_dest_item">
<description>
Sets the item that is highlighted for feedback.
@@ -43362,25 +44330,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
-<description>
-Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
-increased.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> The index.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_set">
<description>
Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon set. Sample stock sizes are
@@ -43493,43 +44442,26 @@ to the last row in @list_store.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_text_btree_validate">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_color">
<description>
-Validate a single contiguous invalid region of a #GtkTextBTree for
-a given view.
+Sets the current color to be @color. The first time this is called, it will
+also set the original color to be @color too.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBTree
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="view_id">
-<parameter_description> view id
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_pixels">
-<parameter_description> the maximum number of pixels to validate. (No more
-than one paragraph beyond this limit will be validated)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store starting y coordinate of validated region
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="old_height">
-<parameter_description> location to store old height of validated region
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_height">
-<parameter_description> location to store new height of validated region
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> an array of 4 doubles specifying the red, green, blue and opacity
+to set the current color to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if a region has been validated, %FALSE if the
-entire tree was already valid.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_has_tooltip">
@@ -43683,11 +44615,11 @@ Fills in @width and @height with the appropriate size of @cell.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the fixed width of the widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the fixed width of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the fixed height of the widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the fixed height of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -43779,67 +44711,60 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_window">
+<function name="gtk_editable_cut_clipboard">
<description>
-Retrieves the #GdkWindow corresponding to an area of the text view;
-possible windows include the overall widget window, child windows
-on the left, right, top, bottom, and the window that displays the
-text buffer. Windows are %NULL and nonexistent if their width or
-height is 0, and are nonexistent before the widget has been
-realized.
-
+Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
+puts it on the clipboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="win">
-<parameter_description> window to get
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkWindow, or %NULL
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
+<function name="gtk_link_button_get_uri">
<description>
-Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
-is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
-multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
+Retrieves the URI set using gtk_link_button_set_uri().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable rubber banding
+<parameter name="link_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a valid URI. The returned string is owned by the link button
+and should not be modified or freed.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_shell_cancel">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end">
<description>
-Cancels the selection within the menu shell.
+Moves forward to the next visible word end. (If @iter is currently on a
+word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
+are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
+language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
+algorithms).
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_shell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_no_show_all">
@@ -43979,27 +44904,47 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_valid">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
<description>
-Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
-a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
-plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
-But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
-as an accelerator.
+Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the current
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> a GDK keyval
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> modifier mask
+</parameters>
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the current
+page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then
+-1 will be returned.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing">
+<description>
+Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
+If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the
+#GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.
+
+This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
+in response to the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal of
+#GtkCellEditable.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="canceled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the editing has been canceled
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator is valid
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_at_anchor">
@@ -44072,27 +45017,37 @@ g_intern_static_string().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_has_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
<description>
-Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered
-with @uri inside the recent manager.
+Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
+to widget relative coordinates.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a URI
+<parameter name="bx">
+<parameter_description> bin_window X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="by">
+<parameter_description> bin_window Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> return location for widget X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> return location for widget Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the resource was found, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute">
@@ -44126,35 +45081,22 @@ column 2.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkIMContextInfo">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
<description>
-Bookkeeping information about a loadable input method.
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> The unique identification string of the input method.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_name">
-<parameter_description> The human-readable name of the input method.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="domain">
-<parameter_description> Translation domain to be used with dgettext()
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="domain_dirname">
-<parameter_description> Name of locale directory for use with bindtextdomain()
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="default_locales">
-<parameter_description> A colon-separated list of locales where this input method
-should be the default. The asterisk "*" sets the default for all locales.
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_frame_get_shadow_type">
@@ -44304,28 +45246,6 @@ displaying the file.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_lookup_icon_set">
-<description>
-Looks up @stock_id in the icon factories associated with @style
-and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
-otherwise %NULL.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> icon set of @stock_id
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize">
<description>
This function deserializes rich text in format @format and inserts
@@ -44420,24 +45340,23 @@ defined as @widget->window coordinates for widgets that are not
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_image">
<description>
-Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
-the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
-gtk_layout_set_size ().
+Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given #GdkPixbuf.
+GTK+ will take responsibility for responding for requests
+for the image, and for converting the image into the
+requested format.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44546,74 +45465,19 @@ is not honoured unless both @x and @y are set.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag_by_name">
-<description>
-Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
-get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of a named #GtkTextTag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> one bound of range to be tagged
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> other bound of range to be tagged
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
-printf()-style), which is marked up with the
-<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-
-Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
-bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
-
-Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
-like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
-may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
-to escape it.
-
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gchar *msg;
-
-msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
-gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
-g_free (msg);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
-
-Since: 2.6
+Return value: a line number
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
- <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a line number
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_for_attach_widget">
@@ -44726,6 +45590,27 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entry">
+<description>
+Deletes the menu item which was created from @entry by the given
+item factory.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactoryEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_layout_put">
<description>
Adds @child_widget to @layout, at position (@x,@y).
@@ -44754,16 +45639,18 @@ Adds @child_widget to @layout, at position (@x,@y).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_prefix">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_homogeneous_tabs">
<description>
-Requests a prefix insertion.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Sets whether the tabs must have all the same size or not.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if all tabs should be the same size.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44854,23 +45741,26 @@ and when the embedding ends.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Sets the default right margin for text in the text view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
+
+It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="right_margin">
-<parameter_description> right margin in pixels
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkToolButton
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_size_wildcarded">
@@ -45003,26 +45893,28 @@ Deprecated: 2.8:
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_header_image">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string">
<description>
-Gets the header image for @page.
+Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path_string, if it
+exists. Otherwise, @iter is left invalid and %FALSE is returned.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path_string">
+<parameter_description> A string representation of a #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the header image for @page, or %NULL
-if there's no header image for the page.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -45043,6 +45935,34 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
+
+If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators, then pass in
+%NULL for accel_group. Next call gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() with an
+appropriate path for the menu item, use gtk_stock_lookup() to look up the
+standard accelerator for the stock item, and if one is found, call
+gtk_accel_map_add_entry() to register it.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup to add the menu items accelerator to,
+or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_number_up_layout">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT.
@@ -45128,38 +46048,35 @@ with a context for the source side of a drag)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
<description>
-Sets the title of the @tree_column. If a custom widget has been set, then
-this value is ignored.
+Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
+hidden (invisible to the user).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> The title of the @tree_column.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_tag_table">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_sensitive">
<description>
-Get the #GtkTextTagTable associated with this buffer.
-
+Return value: %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the buffer's tag table
+<return> %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -45469,22 +46386,24 @@ values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_editable">
+<function name="GtkActionGroup">
<description>
-Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
-widget or not.
+The ::post-activate signal is emitted just after the @action in the
+ action_group is activated
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_set_editable() instead.
+This is intended for #GtkUIManager to proxy the signal and provide global
+notification just after any action is activated.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text
-in the widget
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45508,21 +46427,43 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_default_source">
+<function name="gtk_widget_render_icon">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
+A convenience function that uses the theme engine and RC file
+settings for @widget to look up @stock_id and render it to
+a pixbuf. @stock_id should be a stock icon ID such as
+#GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. @size should be a size
+such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. @detail should be a string that
+identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so that
+theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or code.
+
+The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
+the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
+after use with g_object_unref().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> a stock ID
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means render at
+the size of the source and don't scale (if there are multiple
+source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> render detail to pass to theme engine
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default source
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn't known
</return>
</function>
@@ -45573,20 +46514,26 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_number_up">
+<function name="gtk_image_get_pixmap">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Gets the pixmap and mask being displayed by the #GtkImage.
+The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_PIXMAP (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned pixmap and mask.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="number_up">
-<parameter_description> the number of pages per sheet
+<parameter name="pixmap">
+<parameter_description> location to store the pixmap, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> location to store the mask, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45659,6 +46606,16 @@ on #GtkWidget.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="_gtk_xembed_pop_message">
+<description>
+Removes an event added with _gtk_xembed_push_message()
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_map_unlock_path">
<description>
Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_map_lock_path() on this @accel_path.
@@ -45813,25 +46770,10 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_get_event_widget">
-<description>
-If @event is %NULL or the event was not associated with any widget,
-Return value: the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paint_box">
+<function name="gtk_paint_slider">
<description>
-Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
+Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
+given style and orientation.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45848,7 +46790,7 @@ Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+<parameter_description> a shadow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
@@ -45865,19 +46807,44 @@ output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the box
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the box
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the box
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the box
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_gicon">
+<description>
+Makes @status_icon display the #GIcon.
+See gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon() for details.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a GIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45899,6 +46866,31 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the cells are all constrained to the same size
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_builder_get_type_from_name">
+<description>
+Looks up a type by name, using the virtual function that
+#GtkBuilder has for that purpose. This is mainly used when
+implementing the #GtkBuildable interface on a type.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type_name">
+<parameter_description> type name to lookup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GType found for @type_name or #G_TYPE_INVALID
+if no type was found
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_deleted">
<description>
Emits the "row-deleted" signal on @tree_model. This should be called by
@@ -45988,9 +46980,15 @@ event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
<function name="GtkPrintOperation">
<description>
-Determines whether there is a selection in your application.
-This can allow your application to print the selection.
-This is typically used to make a "Selection" button sensitive.
+The number of pages that will be printed.
+
+Note that this value is set during print preparation phase
+(%GTK_PRINT_STATUS_PREPARING), so this value should never be
+get before the data generation phase (%GTK_PRINT_STATUS_GENERATING_DATA).
+You can connect to the #GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal
+and call gtk_print_operation_get_n_pages_to_print() when
+print status is %GTK_PRINT_STATUS_GENERATING_DATA.
+This is typically used to track the progress of print operation.
Since: 2.18
@@ -46000,45 +46998,44 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_recent_chooser_get_recent_manager">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkRecentManager used by @chooser.
+Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in
+the about dialog. If it is %NULL, the default
+window icon set with gtk_window_set_default_icon()
+will be used.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the recent manager for @chooser.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_new_from_animation">
+<function name="_gtk_recent_chooser_get_recent_manager">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkImage displaying the given animation.
-The #GtkImage does not assume a reference to the
-animation; you still need to unref it if you own references.
-#GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
-
-Note that the animation frames are shown using a timeout with
-#G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT. When using animations to indicate busyness,
-keep in mind that the animation will only be shown if the main loop
-is not busy with something that has a higher priority.
+Gets the #GtkRecentManager used by @chooser.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> an animation
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImage widget
+<return> the recent manager for @chooser.
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -46126,27 +47123,28 @@ Return value: %TRUE if #path is expanded.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_key_hash_lookup_keyval">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder">
<description>
-Looks up the best matching entry or entries in the hash table for a
-given keyval/modifiers pair. It's better to use
-_gtk_key_hash_lookup() if you have the original #GdkEventKey
-available. The results are sorted so that entries with less
-modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
+Sets the current folder for @chooser from a local filename.
+The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
+plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_hash">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkKeyHash
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEvent
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the full path of the new current folder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GSList of all matching entries.
+<return> %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
+otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -46184,6 +47182,28 @@ Deprecated: 2.12:
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_reorderable">
+<description>
+Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the tab is reorderable.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_set_select_function">
<description>
Sets the selection function. If set, this function is called before any node
@@ -46331,6 +47351,33 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkPrintOperationPreview">
+<description>
+The ::got-page-size signal is emitted once for each page
+that gets rendered to the preview.
+
+A handler for this signal should update the @context
+according to @page_setup and set up a suitable cairo
+context, using gtk_print_context_set_cairo_context().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="preview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the current #GtkPrintContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_setup">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPageSetup for the current page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_search">
<description>
Searches forward for @str. Any match is returned by setting
@@ -46512,18 +47559,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToggleToolButton">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_copy">
<description>
-Emitted whenever the toggle tool button changes state.
+Makes a copy of a #GtkSelectionData structure and its data.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle_tool_button">
-<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a pointer to a copy of @data.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_remove_accel_group">
@@ -46789,41 +47838,27 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_add_mark">
+<function name="gtk_dialog_add_action_widget">
<description>
-
-Adds a mark at @value.
-
-A mark is indicated visually by drawing a tick mark next to the scale,
-and GTK+ makes it easy for the user to position the scale exactly at the
-marks value.
-
-If @markup is not %NULL, text is shown next to the tick mark.
-
-To remove marks from a scale, use gtk_scale_clear_marks().
-
-Since: 2.16
+Adds an activatable widget to the action area of a #GtkDialog,
+connecting a signal handler that will emit the #GtkDialog::response
+signal on the dialog when the widget is activated. The widget is
+appended to the end of the dialog's action area. If you want to add a
+non-activatable widget, simply pack it into the @action_area field
+of the #GtkDialog struct.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value at which the mark is placed, must be between
-the lower and upper limits of the scales' adjustment
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, #GTK_POS_TOP
-is drawn above the scale, anything else below. For a vertical scale,
-#GTK_POS_LEFT is drawn to the left of the scale, anything else to the
-right.
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> an activatable widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> Text to be shown at the mark, using <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup</link>, or %NULL
+<parameter name="response_id">
+<parameter_description> response ID for @child
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46874,23 +47909,14 @@ typically "do what you mean."
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_set_use_underline">
+<function name="GtkRuler">
<description>
-If true, an underline in the text of the expander label indicates
-the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+The metric used for the ruler.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_underline">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -47157,6 +48183,23 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_padding">
+<description>
+Return value: the padding around items
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the padding around items
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_label_get_width_chars">
<description>
Retrieves the desired width of @label, in characters. See
@@ -47176,34 +48219,22 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
<description>
-This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
-models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
-#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
-these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
-model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
-these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
-row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
-the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
-drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
+Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
-This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
-reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
-handle drag and drop manually.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="reorderable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the name of @size
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_previous_alpha">
@@ -47347,6 +48378,28 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter">
+<description>
+Sets @child_iter to point to the row pointed to by @sorted_iter.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_iter">
+<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sorted_iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on @tree_model_sort.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hover_selection">
<description>
Enables of disables the hover selection mode of @tree_view.
@@ -47430,23 +48483,33 @@ determined by the widget the menu is attached to.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_logo">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_pixbuf">
<description>
-Return value: the pixbuf displayed as logo. The pixbuf is
+Inserts an image into the text buffer at @iter. The image will be
+counted as one character in character counts, and when obtaining
+the buffer contents as a string, will be represented by the Unicode
+"object replacement character" 0xFFFC. Note that the "slice"
+variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string include
+this character for pixbufs, but the "text" variants do
+not. e.g. see gtk_text_buffer_get_slice() and
+gtk_text_buffer_get_text().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> location to insert the pixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the pixbuf displayed as logo. The pixbuf is
-owned by the about dialog. If you want to keep a reference
-to it, you have to call g_object_ref() on it.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_get_icon_name">
@@ -47510,24 +48573,23 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_range().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_equal">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_type">
<description>
-Compares two #GtkPaperSize objects.
+Gets the page type of @page.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size1">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size2">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @size1 and @size2
-represent the same paper size
+<return> the page type of @page.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -47770,62 +48832,18 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_gravity().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
+<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_new">
<description>
-Return value: the modifier mask used to activate
+Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the modifier mask used to activate
-mnemonics on this window.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
-<description>
-This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
-#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
+<return> the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
-no action should be activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="on_change">
-<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_key_hash_lookup">
@@ -48162,6 +49180,77 @@ this operation.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_emit_inserted_text">
+<description>
+Used when subclassing #GtkEntryBuffer
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> position at which text was inserted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="chars">
+<parameter_description> text that was inserted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> number of characters inserted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_targets_include_uri">
+<description>
+Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide an uri list.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the length of @targets
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for uri lists,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_default">
+<description>
+Determines whether @widget can be a default widget. See
+gtk_widget_set_can_default().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_set_visible">
<description>
Changes the visible of @action_group.
@@ -48333,6 +49422,32 @@ Remove all binding sets that were added by gtk_binding_parse_binding().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkImageMenuItem">
+<description>
+The Accel Group to use for stock accelerator keys
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_rc_reparse_all">
+<description>
+If the modification time on any previously read file for the
+default #GtkSettings has changed, discard all style information
+and then reread all previously read RC files.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the files were reread.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_class_install_child_property">
<description>
Installs a child property on a container class.
@@ -48436,28 +49551,24 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_label">
<description>
-Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
-The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned #GIcon.
-
-If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
+Sets the label of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the label text to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_new">
@@ -48547,53 +49658,22 @@ Returns: whether the current value is displayed as a string
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_pack_start">
+<function name="gtk_plug_get_socket_window">
<description>
-Packs the @cell into the beginning of @cell_layout. If @expand is %FALSE,
-then the @cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
-is divided evenly between cells for which @expand is %TRUE.
+Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
-Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
-
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout.
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_filter">
-<description>
-Adds a filter to the global list of accel path filters.
-
-Accel map entries whose accel path matches one of the filters
-are skipped by gtk_accel_map_foreach().
-
-This function is intended for GTK+ modules that create their own
-menus, but don't want them to be saved into the applications accelerator
-map dump.
+<return> the window of the socket, or %NULL
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter_pattern">
-<parameter_description> a pattern (see #GPatternSpec)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution_x">
@@ -48676,19 +49756,16 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_current_alpha">
+<function name="gtk_style_unref">
<description>
-Sets the current opacity to be @alpha. The first time this is called, it will
-also set the original opacity to be @alpha too.
+Decrease the reference count of @style.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_unref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="alpha">
-<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48747,24 +49824,28 @@ their visual representation if the @accel_closure is theirs.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_filter">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
<description>
-Sets a callback called for each file/directory to see whether
-it should be included in model. If this function was made
-public, we'd want to include a GDestroyNotify as well.
+Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
+area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
+in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
+this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
+using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
+
+If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="mode">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> function to be called for each file
+<parameter name="tree_x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @filter
+<parameter name="tree_y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48851,39 +49932,50 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_reset_default_sort_func">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_width">
<description>
-This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That
-is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model
-to be in the same order as the child model only if the #GtkTreeModelSort
-is in 'unsorted' state.
+Gets the paper width of the #GtkPaperSize, in
+units of @unit.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper width
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_group_set_ignore_hidden">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag_by_name">
<description>
-Sets whether unmapped widgets should be ignored when
-calculating the size.
-
-Since: 2.8
+Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
+get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ignore_hidden">
-<parameter_description> whether unmapped widgets should be ignored
-when calculating the size
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of a named #GtkTextTag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> one bound of range to be tagged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> other bound of range to be tagged
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48912,26 +50004,26 @@ then 0 is returned.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_changed">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends">
<description>
-Emits the "row-changed" signal on @tree_model.
+Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() @count times (or until
+gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
+negative, moves backward instead of forward.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath pointing to the changed row
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the changed row
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of sentences to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_focus_on_click">
@@ -49372,21 +50464,21 @@ the Shift modifier.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
-
+Returns: the icon name or %NULL if the window has
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="other">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a copy of @other
+<return> the icon name or %NULL if the window has
+no themed icon
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -49435,30 +50527,6 @@ attribute of tags.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_hsv_get_metrics">
-<description>
-Queries the size and ring width of an HSV color selector.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> An HSV color selector
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the diameter of the hue ring
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ring_width">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the width of the hue ring
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_source">
<description>
Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_source(). Calling this
@@ -49515,21 +50583,19 @@ expander column to a hidden column.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_modifier_style">
+<function name="gtk_editable_copy_clipboard">
<description>
-Return value: the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is
+Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
+puts it on the clipboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is
-owned by the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this
-around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_info_free">
@@ -49713,18 +50779,24 @@ Creates a new #GtkViewport with the given adjustments.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_type">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_example_icon_name">
<description>
-Return value: a #GType.
+Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
+current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
+a list of themes to the user.)
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GType.
+<return> the name of an example icon or %NULL.
+Free with g_free().
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -49750,8 +50822,10 @@ added, so you do not need to unref it.
<description>
Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
inside. @widget must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
-something like #GtkFrame won't work. (More precisely, it must have the
-%GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set.)
+something like #GtkFrame won't work.
+
+More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
+gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49889,22 +50963,37 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_move_item">
<description>
-Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop.
-See gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable().
+Changes the location of a recently used resource from @uri to @new_uri.
+
+Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
+by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI of a recently used resource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_uri">
+<parameter_description> the new URI of the recently used resource, or %NULL to
+remove the item pointed by @uri in the list
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the list can be reordered.
+<return> %TRUE on success.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -50059,6 +51148,12 @@ Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
Retrieves the contents of the entry widget.
See also gtk_editable_get_chars().
+This is equivalent to:
+
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gtk_entry_buffer_get_text (gtk_entry_get_buffer (entry));
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -50341,25 +51436,32 @@ Return value: %TRUE, if any of the cells packed into the @tree_column are curren
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_to_tag_toggle">
+<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
<description>
-Moves backward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
-#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
- tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
-Return value: whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
+Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
+gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
+return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
+empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
+
+Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
+2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
+be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
+widget.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
+<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
+by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -50464,14 +51566,28 @@ Removes a plug from a socket within the same application.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkImageMenuItem">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
<description>
-The Accel Group to use for stock accelerator keys
+Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
+lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
+by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
-Since: 2.16
+Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
+wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
+conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
+container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
+set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wrap">
+<parameter_description> the setting
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -50493,6 +51609,27 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_padding">
+<description>
+Sets the ::item-padding property which specifies the padding
+around each of the icon view's items.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column_spacing">
+<parameter_description> the item padding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_button_set_use_alpha">
<description>
Sets whether or not the color button should use the alpha channel.
@@ -50536,18 +51673,19 @@ effect on labels containing only a single line.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_next">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
<description>
-Moves the @path to point to the next node at the current depth.
+Return value: %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_pixbuf">
@@ -50634,21 +51772,21 @@ take the screen for an argument.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_out">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the horizontal aspect.
-
+Notify the input method that the widget to which this
+input context corresponds has lost focus. The input method
+may, for example, change the displayed feedback or reset the contexts
+state to reflect this change.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
-used.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_event_box_set_above_child">
@@ -50962,46 +52100,18 @@ such as #GtkToggleButton.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget">
<description>
-Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
-UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
-them with the current contents of @builder.
-
-<note><para>
-If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
-its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
-#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
-</para></note>
-
+Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> the string to parse
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="object_ids">
-<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list">
@@ -51092,24 +52202,22 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_visible_horizontal">
+<function name="gtk_action_group_list_actions">
<description>
-Sets whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally.
+Lists the actions in the action group.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
-<parameter_description> Whether @tool_item is visible when in horizontal mode
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an allocated list of the action objects in the action group
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_match">
@@ -51373,45 +52481,45 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
<description>
-Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
-gtk_style_lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example,
-gtk_image_new_from_stock() will be able to find icons in @factory.
-There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
-application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
-can be overridden by themes.
+Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default bottom margin
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_targets_include_text">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_prepend_page">
<description>
-Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide text.
+Prepends a page to the @assistant.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the length of @targets
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for text,
-otherwise %FALSE.
+<return> the index (starting at 0) of the inserted page
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -51754,23 +52862,25 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_inner_border">
+<function name="GtkActivatable">
<description>
-This function returns the entry's #GtkEntry:inner-border property. See
-gtk_entry_set_inner_border() for more information.
+Whether this activatable should reset its layout
+and appearance when setting the related action or when
+the action changes appearance.
+
+See the #GtkAction documentation directly to find which properties
+should be ignored by the #GtkActivatable when this property is %FALSE.
+<note><para>#GtkActivatable implementors need to handle this property
+and call gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties() on the activatable
+widget when it changes.</para></note>
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the entry's #GtkBorder, or %NULL if none was set.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_stock">
@@ -51816,44 +52926,40 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_selection">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> if the selection data contains a list of
-URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
-containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
-non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
-
-Since: 2.6
+<return> A #GtkTreeSelection object.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_get_file_system">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_app_paintable">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkFileSystem of @chooser; this is an internal
-implementation detail, used for conversion between paths
-and filenames and URIs.
+Determines whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
+an #GtkWidget::expose-event handler.
+
+See gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the file system for @chooser.
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is app paintable
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -51933,19 +53039,34 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_check() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_events">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action">
<description>
-Return value: event mask for @widget
+Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
+call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
+user-visible operation. The operations between
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
+gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating
+an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
+a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
+"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
+outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
+from other user actions.
+
+The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
+user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
+no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
+single call to one of those functions.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> event mask for @widget
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="GtkCellRendererText">
@@ -52134,21 +53255,35 @@ match
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_remove_page">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
<description>
-Removes a page from the notebook given its index
-in the notebook.
+Return value: The depth of @path
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_num">
-<parameter_description> the index of a notebook page, starting
-from 0. If -1, the last page will
-be removed.
+</parameters>
+<return> The depth of @path
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_embed_page_setup">
+<description>
+Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embed">
+<parameter_description> embed page setup selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52207,27 +53342,32 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_text_chars">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag">
<description>
-Moves backward by @count text characters (pixbufs, widgets,
-etc. do not count as characters for this). Equivalent to moving
-through the results of gtk_text_iter_get_text (), rather than
-gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
-
+Emits the "remove-tag" signal. The default handler for the signal
+removes all occurrences of @tag from the given range. @start and
+ end don't have to be in order.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of chars to move
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> one bound of range to be untagged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> other bound of range to be untagged
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_calendar_get_detail_width_chars">
@@ -52474,6 +53614,35 @@ be removed from the size group.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_key_file">
+<description>
+Reads a paper size from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the papersize from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name ofthe group in the key file to read,
+or %NULL to read the first group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object with the restored
+paper size, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_text_column">
<description>
Sets the column with text for @icon_view to be @column. The text
@@ -52495,21 +53664,19 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_text_column">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_free">
<description>
-Return value: the column containing the strings
+Frees a #GtkSelectionData structure returned from
+gtk_selection_data_copy().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the column containing the strings
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_collate">
@@ -52567,30 +53734,22 @@ and must not be freed or modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_forward_display_line">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_get_screen">
<description>
-Moves the given @iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.
-A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
-separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
-Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
-wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
-same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
-views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
+Gets the screen on which windows of the #GtkMountOperation
+will be shown.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+<return> the screen on which windows of @op are shown
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -52614,38 +53773,42 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_group">
+<function name="gtk_menu_shell_cancel">
<description>
-Gets the current group identificator pointer for @notebook.
+Cancels the selection within the menu shell.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="menu_shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the group identificator, or %NULL if none is set.
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_valid">
<description>
-Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the current
+Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
+a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
+plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
+But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
+as an accelerator.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> a GDK keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> modifier mask
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the current
-page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then
--1 will be returned.
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator is valid
</return>
</function>
@@ -52710,26 +53873,6 @@ emitting #GtkWidget::hierarchy-changed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_display_name">
-<description>
-Gets the name of the resource. If none has been defined, the basename
-of the resource is obtained.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the display name of the resource. The returned string
-is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_get_position">
<description>
This function returns the position you need to pass to
@@ -52957,24 +54100,22 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkActionGroup">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_editable">
<description>
-The ::post-activate signal is emitted just after the @action in the
- action_group is activated
-
-This is intended for #GtkUIManager to proxy the signal and provide global
-notification just after any action is activated.
+Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
+widget or not.
-Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_set_editable() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the group
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text
+in the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53047,21 +54188,55 @@ on #GtkWidget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_paint_box">
<description>
-Makes @status_icon display the #GIcon.
-See gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon() for details.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a GIcon
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53147,32 +54322,34 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_toggle_button_set_inconsistent().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_remove_item">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
<description>
-Removes a resource pointed by @uri from the recently used resources
-list handled by a recent manager.
+Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
+"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
+always set these to the same value for all windows in an
+application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
+this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
+gtk_window_set_role() on each window in your application, for the
+benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
+manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI of the item you wish to remove
+<parameter name="wmclass_name">
+<parameter_description> window name hint
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter name="wmclass_class">
+<parameter_description> window class hint
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the item pointed by @uri has been successfully
-removed by the recently used resources list, and %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_use_preview_label">
@@ -53317,6 +54494,28 @@ Initializes @iter to the start of the given line.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_visible">
+<description>
+Determines whether the widget is visible. Note that this doesn't
+take into account whether the widget's parent is also visible
+or the widget is obscured in any way.
+
+See gtk_widget_set_visible().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is visible
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_selection_palette_to_string">
<description>
Encodes a palette as a string, useful for persistent storage.
@@ -53542,25 +54741,6 @@ implementation and should be freed by the caller.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_use_underline">
-<description>
-If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates
-the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_underline">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_left_gravity">
<description>
Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
@@ -53596,25 +54776,21 @@ of the widget's requisition with other widgets.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
<description>
-Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
-The step size is used when the user clicks the #GtkScrollbar
-arrows or moves #GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size
-is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
+Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
+it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> step size
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> page size
+<parameter name="show_not_found">
+<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53659,6 +54835,28 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_path_from_widget">
+<description>
+If @widget has been created by an item factory, returns the full path
+to it. (The full path of a widget is the concatenation of the factory
+path specified in gtk_item_factory_new() with the path specified in the
+#GtkItemFactoryEntry from which the widget was created.)
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the full path to @widget if it has been created by an item
+factory, %NULL otherwise. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not be
+modified or freed.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_list_store_move_before">
<description>
Moves @iter in @store to the position before @position. Note that this
@@ -53781,7 +54979,7 @@ with a context for the source side of a drag)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> the transparency mask for the icon or %NULL for none.
+<parameter_description> the transparency mask for the icon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="hot_x">
@@ -53904,19 +55102,41 @@ Return value: The minimum width of the @tree_column.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_label_set_accel_closure">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_layout_offsets">
<description>
-Sets the closure to be monitored by this accelerator label. The closure
-must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
+
+Obtains the position of the #PangoLayout used to render text
+in the entry, in widget coordinates. Useful if you want to line
+up the text in an entry with some other text, e.g. when using the
+entry to implement editable cells in a sheet widget.
+
+Also useful to convert mouse events into coordinates inside the
+#PangoLayout, e.g. to take some action if some part of the entry text
+is clicked.
+
+Note that as the user scrolls around in the entry the offsets will
+change; you'll need to connect to the "notify::scroll-offset"
+signal to track this. Remember when using the #PangoLayout
+functions you need to convert to and from pixels using
+PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
+
+Keep in mind that the layout text may contain a preedit string, so
+gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index() and
+gtk_entry_text_index_to_layout_index() are needed to convert byte
+indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelLabel
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_closure">
-<parameter_description> the closure to monitor for accelerator changes.
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53958,30 +55178,26 @@ Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_path">
<description>
-Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
-"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
-always set these to the same value for all windows in an
-application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
-this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
-gtk_window_set_role() on each window in your application, for the
-benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
-manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
+Sets the accel path for this action. All proxy widgets associated
+with the action will have this accel path, so that their
+accelerators are consistent.
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wmclass_name">
-<parameter_description> window name hint
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wmclass_class">
-<parameter_description> window class hint
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -54125,22 +55341,29 @@ If appropriate, the returned values have to be freed or unreferenced.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
<description>
-Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
-
+Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
+The step size is used when the user clicks the #GtkScrollbar
+arrows or moves #GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size
+is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> step size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> page size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page orientation
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_viewport_set_vadjustment">
@@ -54288,29 +55511,27 @@ none has been set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_header_image">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_group">
<description>
-Sets a header image for @page. This image is displayed in the header
-area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
+Checks whether @group_name appears inside the groups registered for the
+recently used item @info.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the new header image @page
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> name of a group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the group was found.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_queue_resize">
@@ -54330,29 +55551,31 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_get_type_from_name">
+<function name="gtk_plug_construct_for_display">
<description>
-Looks up a type by name, using the virtual function that
-#GtkBuilder has for that purpose. This is mainly used when
-implementing the #GtkBuildable interface on a type.
+Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
+ socket_id which is currently displayed on @display.
+This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="type_name">
-<parameter_description> type name to lookup
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's
+#GtkSocket.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="socket_id">
+<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GType found for @type_name or #G_TYPE_INVALID
-if no type was found
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_new">
@@ -54488,16 +55711,22 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRendererPixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_allocation">
<description>
-The GIcon representing the icon to display.
-If the icon theme is changed, the image will be updated
-automatically.
+Retrieves the widget's allocation.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="allocation">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -54567,6 +55796,54 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_header_image">
+<description>
+Gets the header image for @page.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the header image for @page, or %NULL
+if there's no header image for the page.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_header_image">
+<description>
+Sets a header image for @page. This image is displayed in the header
+area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the new header image @page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_purge_items">
<description>
Purges every item from the recently used resources list.
@@ -54716,49 +55993,6 @@ graphics context of @style
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
-<description>
-You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
- path This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
-so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
-returned. However, unlike references created with
-gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
-The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
-gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted(), gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted(),
-gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered().
-
-These functions must be called exactly once per proxy when the
-corresponding signal on the model is emitted. This single call
-updates all row references for that proxy. Since built-in GTK+
-objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
-using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
-Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
-doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
-
-This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
-carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
-generally needed by most applications.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> A proxy #GObject
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreePath to monitor
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_job_get_status">
<description>
Gets the status of the print job.
@@ -54865,28 +56099,52 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
+<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
-position in @entry.
-
+Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
+using the given style and state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> the icon position
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x1">
+<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x2">
+<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
-with g_free() when done.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_ppd_name">
@@ -55042,43 +56300,74 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_uri">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func">
<description>
-Sets the file referred to by @uri as the current file for the file chooser,
-by changing to the URI's parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
-list. If the @chooser is #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the URI's base
-name will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
+Sets the page forwarding function to be @page_func, this function will
+be used to determine what will be the next page when the user presses
+the forward button. Setting @page_func to %NULL will make the assistant
+to use the default forward function, which just goes to the next visible
+page.
-If the URI isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder
-of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @uri. This is equivalent
-to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
-gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
+Since: 2.10
-Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
-directory change.
-If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
-you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
-user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
-does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
-a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
-file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_func">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAssistantPageFunc, or %NULL to use the default one
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @page_func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_data_type">
+<description>
+Retrieves the data type of the selection.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI to set as current
+</parameters>
+<return> the data type of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
+<description>
+Returns: %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the URI was
-selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -55104,21 +56393,31 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
+as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
+If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
+text direction the icon source applies to should be set
+with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
+will only be used with that text direction.
+
+#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
+wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_orientation">
@@ -55246,6 +56545,25 @@ optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter">
+<description>
+Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
+the display of the recently used resources.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GtkRecentFilter object.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_cursor">
<description>
Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
@@ -55301,25 +56619,25 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_settings">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_authors">
<description>
-Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
-current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
-<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
-if don't want to keep it.
+Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="authors">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object with the values from @dialog
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_plug_new">
@@ -55462,23 +56780,28 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_window_unset_focus_and_default">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_select_month">
<description>
-Checks whether the focus and default widgets of @window are
- widget or a descendent of @widget, and if so, unset them.
+Shifts the calendar to a different month.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget inside of @window
+<parameter name="month">
+<parameter_description> a month number between 0 and 11.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="year">
+<parameter_description> the year the month is in.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, always
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_valuesv">
@@ -55659,28 +56982,26 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_targets_include_uri">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
<description>
-Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide an uri list.
+Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
+<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
+the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
+encoded character.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the length of @targets
+<parameter name="byte_on_line">
+<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for uri lists,
-otherwise %FALSE.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_color">
@@ -55769,6 +57090,30 @@ typically either you or gtk_dialog_run() will be monitoring the
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_alignment">
+<description>
+Sets the renderer's alignment within its available space.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the x alignment of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the y alignment of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark">
<description>
Deletes @mark, so that it's no longer located anywhere in the
@@ -56231,22 +57576,22 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_lookup_entry">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_ref">
<description>
-Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
+Increases the reference count of @recent_info by one.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator key to be filled in (optional)
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @accel_path is known, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> the recent info object with its reference count increased
+by one.
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -56357,24 +57702,37 @@ this function has no effect. If @start_offset or
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive_at_cursor">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
+Calls gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive() at the cursor
+position.
+
+ default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't
+have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
+result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="num_copies">
-<parameter_description> the number of copies
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> text in UTF-8 format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> length of text in bytes, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="default_editable">
+<parameter_description> default editability of buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether text was actually inserted
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
@@ -56448,30 +57806,17 @@ inclusive.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_find">
+<function name="GtkWidget">
<description>
-Finds the first entry in an accelerator group for which
- find_func returns %TRUE and returns its #GtkAccelKey.
+The "scroll-arrow-vlength" style property defines the length of
+vertical scroll arrows.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="find_func">
-<parameter_description> a function to filter the entries of @accel_group with
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @find_func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the key of the first entry passing @find_func. The key is
-owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_minus_button">
@@ -56492,6 +57837,23 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_select_all">
+<description>
+Selects all the icons. @icon_view must has its selection mode set
+to #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_item_factory_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkItemFactory.
@@ -56743,76 +58105,38 @@ if no user signal handlers, falls back to a default format.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_popup_data">
<description>
-Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
-signal will be emitted if any lines are validated.
+Obtains the @popup_data which was passed to
+gtk_item_factory_popup_with_data(). This data is available until the menu
+is popped down again.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> iter pointing into a line that will be used as the
-coordinate origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y0_">
-<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
-which to begin validation. (The offset here is in pixels
-after validation.)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y1_">
-<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
-which to end validation. (The offset here is in pixels
-after validation.)
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> @popup_data associated with @ifactory
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_get_surrounding">
+<function name="gtk_editable_delete_selection">
<description>
-Retrieves context around the insertion point. Input methods
-typically want context in order to constrain input text based on
-existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai where
-only some sequences of characters are allowed.
-
-This function is implemented by emitting the
-GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal on the input method; in
-response to this signal, a widget should provide as much context as
-is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling
-gtk_im_context_set_surrounding(). Note that there is no obligation
-for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve_surrounding signal, so input
-methods must be prepared to function without context.
-
+Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
+This call doesn't do anything if there is no selected text.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> location to store a UTF-8 encoded string of text
-holding context around the insertion point.
-If the function returns %TRUE, then you must free
-the result stored in this location with g_free().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_index">
-<parameter_description> location to store byte index of the insertion cursor
-within @text.
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case
-you must free the result stored in *text.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_word_starts">
@@ -57017,20 +58341,6 @@ realized.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_load_scanner">
-<description>
-#GScanner variant of gtk_accel_map_load().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> a #GScanner which has already been provided with an input file
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_create_child_anchor">
<description>
This is a convenience function which simply creates a child anchor
@@ -57197,6 +58507,30 @@ Return value: %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_new">
+<description>
+Create a new GtkEntryBuffer object.
+
+Optionally, specify initial text to set in the buffer.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="initial_chars">
+<parameter_description> initial buffer text, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_initial_chars">
+<parameter_description> number of characters in @initial_chars, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A new GtkEntryBuffer object.
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window">
<description>
Replaces the default, usually yellow, window used for displaying
@@ -57359,18 +58693,27 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_menu_bar_cycle_focus">
+<function name="_gtk_text_layout_get_line_xrange">
<description>
-Move the focus between menubars in the toplevel.
+Find the range of X coordinates for the paragraph containing
+the given iter. Private for 2.0 due to API freeze, could
+be made public for 2.2.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menubar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="dir">
-<parameter_description> direction in which to cycle the focus
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
+or %NULL.
+ width location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
+or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -57628,30 +58971,23 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_clear">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts">
<description>
-The default handler for the #GtkWidget::selection-clear-event
-signal.
+Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> the event
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of times to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the event was handled, otherwise false
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Instead of calling this function, chain up from
-your selection-clear-event handler. Calling this function
-from any other context is illegal.
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -57730,12 +59066,10 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="GtkStyle">
<description>
-Emitted when the group of radio menu items that a radio menu item belongs
-to changes. This is emitted when a radio menu item switches from
-being alone to being part of a group of 2 or more menu items, or
-vice-versa, and when a button is moved from one group of 2 or
-more menu items ton a different one, but not when the composition
-of the group that a menu item belongs to changes.
+Emitted when the aspects of the style specific to a particular colormap
+and depth are being cleaned up. A connection to this signal can be useful
+if a widget wants to cache objects like a #GdkGC as object data on #GtkStyle.
+This signal provides a convenient place to free such cached objects.
Since: 2.4
@@ -57805,42 +59139,14 @@ Obtains information about how @child is packed into @box.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_color">
-<description>
-Sets the current color to be @color. The first time this is called, it will
-also set the original color to be @color too.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> an array of 4 doubles specifying the red, green, blue and opacity
-to set the current color to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_action_set_stock_id">
+<function name="_gtk_xembed_push_message">
<description>
-Sets the stock id on @action
-
-Since: 2.16
+Adds a client message to the stack of current XEMBED events.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the stock id
+<parameter name="xevent">
+<parameter_description> a XEvent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -57877,28 +59183,16 @@ at the cursor
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_entry">
+<function name="gtk_image_new">
<description>
-Sets the entry which the interactive search code will use for this
- tree_view This is useful when you want to provide a search entry
-in our interface at all time at a fixed position. Passing %NULL for
- entry will make the interactive search code use the built-in popup
-entry again.
+Creates a new empty #GtkImage widget.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> the entry the interactive search code of @tree_view should use or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly created #GtkImage widget.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_find_pixmap_in_path">
@@ -57928,22 +59222,19 @@ warning message, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_context">
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_action">
<description>
-Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
-#GtkPrintContext.
+Gets the action for this entry.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="chooser_entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new Pango context for @context
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> the action
</return>
</function>
@@ -58033,59 +59324,38 @@ Return value: %TRUE if visible
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_track_visited_links">
<description>
-Sets @iter to be the child of @parent, using the given index. The first
-index is 0. If @n is too big, or @parent has no children, @iter is set
-to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned. @parent will remain a valid
-node after this function has been called. As a special case, if @parent is
-%NULL, then the @n<!-- -->th root node is set.
-
+Returns: %TRUE if clicked links are remembered
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to set to the nth child.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to get the child from, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n">
-<parameter_description> Then index of the desired child.
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @parent has an @n<!-- -->th child.
+<return> %TRUE if clicked links are remembered
+
+Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
<description>
-Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
-units of @unit.
+Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this
+method sets #GtkIconView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper height
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_frame_dimensions">
@@ -58213,47 +59483,24 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_activatable">
<description>
-Sets the accel path for this action. All proxy widgets associated
-with the action will have this accel path, so that their
-accelerators are consistent.
-
-Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
-g_intern_static_string().
+Sets whether the icon is activatable.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator path
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkRadioButton">
-<description>
-Emitted when the group of radio buttons that a radio button belongs
-to changes. This is emitted when a radio button switches from
-being alone to being part of a group of 2 or more buttons, or
-vice-versa, and when a button is moved from one group of 2 or
-more buttons to a different one, but not when the composition
-of the group that a button belongs to changes.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the icon should be activatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58637,40 +59884,22 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_preview_text">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_job_count">
<description>
-Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
+Gets the number of jobs currently queued on the printer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fontsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
-This string is owned by the widget and should not be
-modified or freed
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
-<description>
-Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
-#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
-to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> the number of jobs on @printer
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_create_drag_icon">
@@ -58730,6 +59959,31 @@ older one.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_location">
+<description>
+Gets a rectangle which roughly contains the character at @iter.
+The rectangle position is in buffer coordinates; use
+gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords() to convert these
+coordinates to coordinates for one of the windows in the text view.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="location">
+<parameter_description> bounds of the character at @iter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toolbar_unset_style">
<description>
Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_toolbar_set_style(), so that
@@ -58788,54 +60042,43 @@ gtk_text_iter_compare().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
<description>
-Return value: a #GList of action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
+Adds @clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection
+contents of @buffer are available. In most cases, @clipboard will be
+the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GList of action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
-and should not be modified.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_on_map">
<description>
-Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
-<emphasis>only</emphasis> be called from a selection handler callback.
-Zero-terminates the stored data.
+Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of selection data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> format (number of bits in a unit)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> pointer to the data (will be copied)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> length of the data
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
+mapped.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_builder_connect_signals">
@@ -58890,47 +60133,33 @@ stock id to select the stock item for the button.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_unref">
+<function name="GtkRadioToolButton">
<description>
-Decrease the reference count of @style.
+Sets a new group for a radio tool button.
-Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_unref() instead.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
<description>
-If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
-as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
-If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
-text direction the icon source applies to should be set
-with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
-will only be used with that text direction.
-
-#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
-wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
-
+Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_get_group">
@@ -58991,6 +60220,25 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_wrap">
+<description>
+Sets the flag that determines if a spin button value wraps around to the
+opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wrap">
+<parameter_description> a flag indicating if wrapping behavior is performed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_size_group_get_mode">
<description>
Gets the current mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
@@ -59007,6 +60255,25 @@ Gets the current mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_sensitive">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is sensitive (in the sense of returning
+the value that has been set using gtk_widget_set_sensitive()). The
+effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its
+own and its parent widget's sensitivity. See gtk_widget_is_sensitive().
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_model">
<description>
Return value: A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
@@ -59022,26 +60289,23 @@ Return value: A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
<description>
-Sets the resize mode for the container.
+Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
+gtk_label_set_width_chars().
-The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
-will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
-or executed immediately.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="resize_mode">
-<parameter_description> the new resize mode
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paint_shadow">
@@ -59120,16 +60384,22 @@ of #GtkScrollbar to the scroll directions of the #GtkLayout.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkScrolledWindow">
+<function name="gtk_button_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
-Whether to place scrollbars within the scrolled window's bevel.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Return value: %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
+the mouse.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_popup_single_match">
@@ -59321,23 +60591,22 @@ source can provide the data.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_focus">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_hadjustment">
<description>
-Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its
-toplevel. (This does not mean that the %HAS_FOCUS flag is
-necessarily set; %HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the
-toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
-
+Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the horizontal scrollbar.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hadjustment">
+<parameter_description> horizontal scroll adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_set_accept_focus">
@@ -59501,23 +60770,27 @@ feedback, such as displaying it in a child of the root window.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_misc_get_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_set">
<description>
-Gets the X and Y alignment of the widget within its allocation.
-See gtk_misc_set_alignment().
+Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="misc">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> location to store Y alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+<parameter name="first_prop_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
+with @first_prop_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -59627,69 +60900,34 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter">
-<description>
-Sets @child_iter to point to the row pointed to by @sorted_iter.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_iter">
-<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sorted_iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on @tree_model_sort.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_calendar_select_month">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_accel_closure">
<description>
-Shifts the calendar to a different month.
-
+Returns: the accel closure for this action. The returned closure is
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="month">
-<parameter_description> a month number between 0 and 11.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="year">
-<parameter_description> the year the month is in.
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, always
+<return> the accel closure for this action. The returned closure is
+owned by GTK+ and must not be unreffed or modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_link_button_get_uri">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_free">
<description>
-Retrieves the URI set using gtk_link_button_set_uri().
-
+Free's @reference. @reference may be %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="link_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a valid URI. The returned string is owned by the link button
-and should not be modified or freed.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_tooltip">
@@ -59751,6 +60989,24 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="_gtk_menu_bar_cycle_focus">
+<description>
+Move the focus between menubars in the toplevel.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menubar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dir">
+<parameter_description> direction in which to cycle the focus
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_get_size">
<description>
Obtains the width and height needed to render the column. This is used
@@ -59825,34 +61081,19 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_enum">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_state">
<description>
-A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
-or gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser() which parses a single
-enumeration value.
-
-The enumeration value can be specified by its name, its nickname or
-its numeric value. For consistency with flags parsing, the value
-may be surrounded by parentheses.
-
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pspec">
-<parameter_description> a #GParamSpec
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gstring">
-<parameter_description> the #GString to be parsed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="property_value">
-<parameter_description> a #GValue which must hold enum values.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
-has been set to the resulting #GEnumValue.
+<return> the state of @widget. See gtk_widget_set_state().
+
+Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -59894,6 +61135,23 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_widget">
+<description>
+Obtains the item factory from which a widget was created.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the item factory from which @widget was created, or %NULL
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_source_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkIconSource. A #GtkIconSource contains a #GdkPixbuf (or
@@ -60124,6 +61382,9 @@ the specified cell. This function is often followed by
widget. Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is
realized.
+If @path is invalid for @model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset
+and the function will return without failing.
+
Since: 2.2
</description>
@@ -60152,12 +61413,14 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_activatable_get_use_action_appearance">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_set_related_action">
<description>
-Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
-and appearance when setting the related action or when
-the action changes appearance.
+Sets the related action on the @activatable object.
+
+<note><para>#GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the #GtkActivatable:related-action
+property and call gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() when it changes.</para></note>
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60165,11 +61428,12 @@ the action changes appearance.
<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAction to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @activatable uses its actions appearance.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_get_default_language">
@@ -60271,50 +61535,39 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
+<function name="_gtk_im_module_create">
<description>
-Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
+Create an IM context of a type specified by the string
+ID @context_id.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> the context ID for the context type to create
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
-
-Since: 2.16
+<return> a newly created input context of or @context_id, or
+if that could not be created, a newly created GtkIMContextSimple.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_set_menu">
<description>
-Turns @tree_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
-method sets #GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+Sets the #GtkMenu that is popped up when the user clicks on the arrow.
+If @menu is NULL, the arrow button becomes insensitive.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_button_mask">
-<parameter_description> Mask of allowed buttons to start drag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> the table of targets that the drag will support
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the number of items in @targets
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="actions">
-<parameter_description> the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this
-widget
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkMenu associated with #GtkMenuToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -60360,35 +61613,6 @@ column @col + 1. See gtk_table_set_col_spacing().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_value">
-<description>
-Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
-The type of @value must be convertible to the type of the
-column.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> column number to modify
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> new value for the cell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_activates_default">
<description>
Retrieves the value set by gtk_entry_set_activates_default().
@@ -60538,6 +61762,34 @@ Return value: A #GdkWindow, or %NULL when @tree_view hasn't been realized yet
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_text">
+<description>
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format
+(with printf()-style).
+
+Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
+bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_nth_item">
<description>
Return value: The @n<!-- -->'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar, or %NULL if there
@@ -60645,31 +61897,21 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_from_array">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
<description>
-Sets an alternative button order. If the
-#GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
-the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
-response ids in @new_order.
-
-See gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more information.
-
-This function is for use by language bindings.
+Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
+the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_params">
-<parameter_description> the number of response ids in @new_order
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
+<parameter name="current_page">
+<parameter_description> the current page number.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -60697,6 +61939,29 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_has_item">
+<description>
+Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered
+with @uri inside the recent manager.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a URI
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the resource was found, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_filter_add_custom">
<description>
Adds a rule to a filter that allows resources based on a custom callback
@@ -60753,19 +62018,31 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
<description>
-Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
+Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
+past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
+the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
+the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
+moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+
+Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -60784,23 +62061,26 @@ Return value: The expander column.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
-appropriately.
+Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the
+attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.
+You'd typically pass the default attributes in to
+gtk_text_iter_get_attributes() in order to get the
+attributes in effect at a given text position.
+
+The return value is a copy owned by the caller of this function,
+and should be freed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> a new #GtkTextAttributes
</return>
</function>
@@ -60889,21 +62169,23 @@ removed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
+<function name="_gtk_window_unset_focus_and_default">
<description>
-Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+Checks whether the focus and default widgets of @window are
+ widget or a descendent of @widget, and if so, unset them.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget inside of @window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_tree_coords">
@@ -61173,26 +62455,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_append_text">
-<description>
-Appends the given text to the contents of the widget.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the text to append
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_ancestor">
<description>
Gets the first ancestor of @widget with type @widget_type. For example,
@@ -61221,69 +62483,48 @@ considers @widget to be an ancestor of itself.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_path_to_child_path">
+<function name="gtk_widget_child_notify">
<description>
-Converts @filter_path to a path on the child model of @filter. That is,
- filter_path points to a location in @filter. The returned path will
-point to the same location in the model not being filtered. If @filter_path
-does not point to a location in the child model, %NULL is returned.
+Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
+<link linkend="child-properties">child property</link> @child_property
+on @widget.
+This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter_path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
+<parameter name="child_property">
+<parameter_description> the name of a child property installed on the
+class of @widget<!-- -->'s parent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_hadjustment">
+<function name="GtkToolShell">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the horizontal scrollbar.
+Dummy structure for accessing instances of #GtkToolShellIface.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hadjustment">
-<parameter_description> horizontal scroll adjustment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_free">
<description>
-Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
-lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
-by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
-
-Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
-wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
-conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
-container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
-set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
+Frees a dynamically-allocated icon source, along with its
+filename, size, and pixbuf fields if those are not %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap">
-<parameter_description> the setting
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61394,69 +62635,75 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_error_bell">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_right_margin">
<description>
-Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.
-If the #GtkSettings:gtk-error-bell setting is %TRUE, it calls
-gdk_window_beep(), otherwise it does nothing.
-
-Note that the effect of gdk_window_beep() can be configured in many
-ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment
-or window manager that is used.
+Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default right margin
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_lock_path">
<description>
-Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
-%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
-This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
-process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
-is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
-get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
-you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
-in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
-gtk_tree_path_free().
+Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn't yet contain
+an entry for @accel_path, a new one is created.
+
+Locking an accelerator path prevents its accelerator from being changed
+during runtime. A locked accelerator path can be unlocked by
+gtk_accel_map_unlock_path(). Refer to gtk_accel_map_change_entry()
+for information about runtime accelerator changes.
+If called more than once, @accel_path remains locked until
+gtk_accel_map_unlock_path() has been called an equivalent number
+of times.
+
+Note that locking of individual accelerator paths is independent from
+locking the #GtkAccelGroup containing them. For runtime accelerator
+changes to be possible both the accelerator path and its #GtkAccelGroup
+have to be unlocked.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> row in @tree_model
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
-is otherwise valid
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget">
+<function name="gtk_widget_error_bell">
<description>
-Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
+Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.
+If the #GtkSettings:gtk-error-bell setting is %TRUE, it calls
+gdk_window_beep(), otherwise it does nothing.
+
+Note that the effect of gdk_window_beep() can be configured in many
+ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment
+or window manager that is used.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_editable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61595,29 +62842,18 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_direction">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_copy_clipboard">
<description>
-Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
-controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
-and also the direction in which the children of a container are
-packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
-so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
-reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
-let the default reading direction present, except for containers
-where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitely
-visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
-
-If the direction is set to %GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value
-set by gtk_widget_set_default_direction() will be used.
+Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="dir">
-<parameter_description> the new direction
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkClipboard object to copy to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61660,21 +62896,18 @@ Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_child_detached">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_buffer">
<description>
-Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
-
+Return value: the buffer
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="handle_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the child is currently detached, otherwise %FALSE
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> the buffer
</return>
</function>
@@ -61692,23 +62925,6 @@ The position of the cursor (focused cell) has changed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_row_spacing">
-<description>
-Return value: the space between rows
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the space between rows
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_is_composited">
<description>
Whether @widget can rely on having its alpha channel
@@ -61949,18 +63165,29 @@ gtk_viewport_set_shadow_type().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
<description>
-Return value: number of characters in the line
+Retrieves the image used for the icon.
+
+Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
+method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
+#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> number of characters in the line
+<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
+
+Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -62003,27 +63230,19 @@ is no next @iter, %FALSE is returned and @iter is set to be invalid.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_get_object">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_tag_table">
<description>
-Gets the object named @name. Note that this function does not
-increment the reference count of the returned object.
+Get the #GtkTextTagTable associated with this buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of object to get
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the object named @name or %NULL if it could not be
-found in the object tree.
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> the buffer's tag table
</return>
</function>
@@ -62062,19 +63281,49 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_accel_closure">
+<function name="gtk_target_list_add">
<description>
-Returns: the accel closure for this action. The returned closure is
+Appends another target to a #GtkTargetList.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> the interned atom representing the target
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> the flags for this target
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the accel closure for this action. The returned closure is
-owned by GTK+ and must not be unreffed or modified.
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_max_length">
+<description>
+Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
+ buffer See gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the maximum allowed number of characters
+in #GtkEntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum.
+
+Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -62101,49 +63350,45 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_file">
+<function name="gtk_scale_add_mark">
<description>
-Sets @file as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
-to the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list. If
-the @chooser is in #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name
-will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
-If the file name isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current
-folder of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename. This
-is equivalent to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
-gtk_file_chooser_select_filename().
+Adds a mark at @value.
-Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
-for the directory change.
+A mark is indicated visually by drawing a tick mark next to the scale,
+and GTK+ makes it easy for the user to position the scale exactly at the
+marks value.
-If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
-you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
-user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
-does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
-a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
-file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+If @markup is not %NULL, text is shown next to the tick mark.
+To remove marks from a scale, use gtk_scale_clear_marks().
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> the #GFile to set as current
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value at which the mark is placed, must be between
+the lower and upper limits of the scales' adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store the error, or %NULL to ignore errors.
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, #GTK_POS_TOP
+is drawn above the scale, anything else below. For a vertical scale,
+#GTK_POS_LEFT is drawn to the left of the scale, anything else to the
+right.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> Text to be shown at the mark, using <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup</link>, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
-selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_draw_box_gap">
@@ -62293,25 +63538,40 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_activatable">
<description>
-Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
+Makes the cell renderer activatable.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> the value to set.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the tab is reorderable.
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.10
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function">
+<description>
+Return value: The function.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The function.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -62890,21 +64150,30 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_handle_position">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_type_hint">
<description>
-Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
-gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
+By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
+manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
+suitable to the function of the window in your application.
+
+This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
+
+gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience functions in GTK+
+will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="handle_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hint">
+<parameter_description> the window type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current handle position.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_current_uri">
@@ -63136,6 +64405,26 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the menu item is checked.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden">
+<description>
+Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_hidden">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_direction">
<description>
Obtains the current default reading direction. See
@@ -63213,19 +64502,47 @@ Return value: the currently pushed colormap, or %NULL if there is none.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
<description>
-Return value: a line number
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
+printf()-style), which is marked up with the
+<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+
+Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
+bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+
+Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
+like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
+may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
+to escape it.
+
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gchar *msg;
+
+msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
+gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
+g_free (msg);
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
+ <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a line number
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_style_ref">
@@ -63450,20 +64767,6 @@ Sets the way @child is packed into @box.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_editable_editing_done">
-<description>
-Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_editable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_set_from_pixbuf">
<description>
See gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf() for details.
@@ -63502,27 +64805,21 @@ gtk_drag_dest_set().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_add_target">
+<function name="gtk_layout_set_hadjustment">
<description>
-Appends a specified target to the list of supported targets for a
-given widget and selection.
+Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
+
+See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTarget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> the selection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> target to add.
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> A unsigned integer which will be passed back to the application.
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -63669,64 +64966,75 @@ gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
<description>
-Return value: Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
+You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
+ path This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
+so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
+returned. However, unlike references created with
+gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
+The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
+gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted(), gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted(),
+gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered().
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
+These functions must be called exactly once per proxy when the
+corresponding signal on the model is emitted. This single call
+updates all row references for that proxy. Since built-in GTK+
+objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
+using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
+Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
+doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_length">
-<description>
-Retrieves the length of the raw data of the selection.
+This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
+carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
+generally needed by most applications.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> A proxy #GObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreePath to monitor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the length of the data of the selection.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_action_connect_proxy">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
-displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
-will be updated appropriately.
+Connects a widget to an action object as a proxy. Synchronises
+various properties of the action with the widget (such as label
+text, icon, tooltip, etc), and attaches a callback so that the
+action gets activated when the proxy widget does.
+
+If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected
+first.
+Since: 2.4
+
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon size
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> the proxy widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_get_restrict_to_fill_level">
@@ -63852,6 +65160,68 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_position">
+<description>
+Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
+coordinates @x and @y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
+the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
+If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
+those to buffer coordinates with
+gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
+
+Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
+which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions <emphasis>between</emphasis>
+characters.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="trailing">
+<parameter_description> if non-%NULL, location to store an integer indicating where
+in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
+zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
+0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x position, in buffer coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y position, in buffer coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_embed_page_setup">
+<description>
+Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::embed-page-setup property.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether page setup selection combos are embedded
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_cell_renderers">
<description>
Return value: a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the
@@ -63930,21 +65300,6 @@ instance with gtk_socket_add_id().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_license">
<description>
Sets the license information to be displayed in the secondary
@@ -64113,37 +65468,6 @@ the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_attach">
-<description>
-Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
-colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
-it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
-involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
-been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
-
-Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
-in the following way:
-<literal>style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)</literal>
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
-If the style is newly created, the style parameter
-will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
-a reference count belonging to the caller.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label">
<description>
Sets @label as the label used for the tool button. The "label" property
@@ -64188,22 +65512,36 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path">
<description>
-Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
-the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
-in a table.
+Set the accelerator path on @menu_item, through which runtime changes of the
+menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be identified and saved to
+persistant storage (see gtk_accel_map_save() on this).
+To setup a default accelerator for this menu item, call
+gtk_accel_map_add_entry() with the same @accel_path.
+See also gtk_accel_map_add_entry() on the specifics of accelerator paths,
+and gtk_menu_set_accel_path() for a more convenient variant of this function.
-Since: 2.4
+This function is basically a convenience wrapper that handles calling
+gtk_widget_set_accel_path() with the appropriate accelerator group for
+the menu item.
+
+Note that you do need to set an accelerator on the parent menu with
+gtk_menu_set_accel_group() for this to work.
+
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Preferred number of columns
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> accelerator path, corresponding to this menu item's
+functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -64297,22 +65635,22 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_ref">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_lookup_entry">
<description>
-Increases the reference count of @recent_info by one.
-
+Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator key to be filled in (optional)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the recent info object with its reference count increased
-by one.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE if @accel_path is known, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
@@ -64368,6 +65706,26 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_activatable_get_use_action_appearance">
+<description>
+Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
+and appearance when setting the related action or when
+the action changes appearance.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @activatable uses its actions appearance.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer_lpi">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
@@ -64420,25 +65778,18 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_socket_get_id">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_free">
<description>
-Gets the window ID of a #GtkSocket widget, which can then
-be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
-instance with gtk_plug_new().
-
-The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
-before you can make this call.
-
+Frees @path.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the window ID for the socket
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement">
@@ -64617,20 +65968,25 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkAction">
+<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_deleted">
<description>
-The "activate" signal is emitted when the action is activated.
+Determines whether a child anchor has been deleted from
+the buffer. Keep in mind that the child anchor will be
+unreferenced when removed from the buffer, so you need to
+hold your own reference (with g_object_ref()) if you plan
+to use this function — otherwise all deleted child anchors
+will also be finalized.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAction
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextChildAnchor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the child anchor has been deleted from its buffer
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_move_child">
@@ -64659,26 +66015,6 @@ Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_items">
-<description>
-Gets the list of recently used resources.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a list of newly allocated #GtkRecentInfo objects. Use
-gtk_recent_info_unref() on each item inside the list, and then
-free the list itself using g_list_free().
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_action_area">
<description>
Returns: the action area.
@@ -64741,21 +66077,6 @@ default widget for the toplevel.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
-<description>
-Return value: The depth of @path
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The depth of @path
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_dialog_get_action_area">
<description>
Returns: the action area.
@@ -64860,49 +66181,24 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_scroll_to_path">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_paper_sizes">
<description>
-Moves the alignments of @icon_view to the position specified by @path.
- row_align determines where the row is placed, and @col_align determines
-where @column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0.
-0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means
-center.
-
-If @use_align is %FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the
-tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen.
-This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current
-position. If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.
-
-This function only works if the model is set, and @path is a valid row on
-the model. If the model changes before the @icon_view is realized, the
-centered path will be modified to reflect this change.
+Creates a list of known paper sizes.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The path of the item to move to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_align">
-<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments, or %FALSE.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="row_align">
-<parameter_description> The vertical alignment of the item specified by @path.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="col_align">
-<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment of the item specified by @path.
+<parameter name="include_custom">
+<parameter_description> whether to include custom paper sizes
+as defined in the page setup dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly allocated list of newly
+allocated #GtkPaperSize objects
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_stock_id">
@@ -64927,37 +66223,46 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive_at_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive() at the cursor
-position.
-
- default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't
-have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
-result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> text in UTF-8 format
+<parameter name="num_copies">
+<parameter_description> the number of copies
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> length of text in bytes, or -1
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_set_screen">
+<description>
+Sets the #GdkScreen where the @window is displayed; if
+the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
+then remapped on the new screen.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="default_editable">
-<parameter_description> default editability of buffer
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether text was actually inserted
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_hsv_new">
@@ -65087,21 +66392,20 @@ to specify your own buffer, consider gtk_text_view_new_with_buffer().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_selection_mode">
+<function name="gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus">
<description>
-Gets the selection mode of the @icon_view.
-
+Return value: %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current selection mode
+<return> %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -65123,20 +66427,19 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_right_margin">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Sets the default right margin for text in the text view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
+<parameter name="right_margin">
+<parameter_description> right margin in pixels
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -65348,39 +66651,24 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_display_button_window">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_uri_targets">
<description>
-Create a window with window title @window_title, text contents @dialog_text,
-and a number of buttons, according to the paired argument list given
-as @... parameters.
-Each button is created with a @label and a ::clicked signal handler that
-incremrents the integer stored in @nump.
-The window will be automatically shown with gtk_widget_show_now() after
-creation, so when this function returns it has already been mapped,
-resized and positioned on screen.
-The window will quit any running gtk_main()-loop when destroyed, and it
-will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
+Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag source. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
+gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window_title">
-<parameter_description> Title of the window to be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dialog_text">
-<parameter_description> Text inside the window to be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> %NULL terminated list of (const char *label, int *nump) pairs.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a widget pointer to the newly created GtkWindow.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_dialog_get_content_area">
@@ -65400,6 +66688,27 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
+<description>
+Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> if the selection data contains a list of
+URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
+containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
+non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_filenames">
<description>
Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
@@ -65447,22 +66756,23 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_copy">
+<function name="gtk_button_set_use_underline">
<description>
-Copies a #GtkTreeRowReference.
-
+If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates
+the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeRowReference
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_underline">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a copy of @reference.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_set_transient_for">
@@ -65514,24 +66824,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_vertical">
-<description>
-Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_tag">
<description>
Return value: whether @iter is the end of a range tagged with @tag
@@ -65570,6 +66862,30 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="_gtk_key_hash_lookup_keyval">
+<description>
+Looks up the best matching entry or entries in the hash table for a
+given keyval/modifiers pair. It's better to use
+_gtk_key_hash_lookup() if you have the original #GdkEventKey
+available. The results are sorted so that entries with less
+modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="key_hash">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkKeyHash
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEvent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GSList of all matching entries.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_translate_string">
<description>
Translates a string using the specified translate_func(). This
@@ -65624,25 +66940,25 @@ in which case nothing will be sent
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_authors">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_settings">
<description>
-Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
-of the secondary credits dialog.
+Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
+current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
+<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
+if don't want to keep it.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="authors">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object with the values from @dialog
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_after">
@@ -65847,25 +67163,22 @@ owned by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_location">
+<function name="GtkStatusbar">
<description>
-Gets a rectangle which roughly contains the character at @iter.
-The rectangle position is in buffer coordinates; use
-gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords() to convert these
-coordinates to coordinates for one of the windows in the text view.
+Is emitted whenever a new message is popped off a statusbar's stack.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="statusbar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> the context id of the relevant message/statusbar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="location">
-<parameter_description> bounds of the character at @iter
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the message that was just popped.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -65930,21 +67243,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
-<description>
-Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_composite_name">
<description>
Obtains the composite name of a widget.
@@ -65963,27 +67261,6 @@ longer needed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_set_page_setup">
-<description>
-Sets the #GtkPageSetup from which the page setup
-dialog takes its values.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetupUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_size_lookup_for_settings">
<description>
Obtains the pixel size of a semantic icon size, possibly
@@ -66047,14 +67324,20 @@ path on the child model, then %NULL is returned.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_xembed_push_message">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_stock_id">
<description>
-Adds a client message to the stack of current XEMBED events.
+Sets the stock id on @action
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="xevent">
-<parameter_description> a XEvent
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the stock id
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -66326,23 +67609,26 @@ Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_set_size_request() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_wrap">
+<function name="gtk_custom_paper_unix_dialog_new">
<description>
-Sets the flag that determines if a spin button value wraps around to the
-opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.
+Creates a new custom paper dialog.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap">
-<parameter_description> a flag indicating if wrapping behavior is performed.
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkCustomPaperUnixDialog
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_border_copy">
@@ -66492,31 +67778,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
-<description>
-Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
-no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
-pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
-wasn't set from a stock id
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
@@ -66616,27 +67877,63 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_activatable_set_related_action">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_copy_target_list">
<description>
-Sets the related action on the @activatable object.
+This function returns the list of targets this text buffer can
+provide for copying and as DND source. The targets in the list are
+added with %info values from the #GtkTextBufferTargetInfo enum,
+using gtk_target_list_add_rich_text_targets() and
+gtk_target_list_add_text_targets().
-<note><para>#GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the #GtkActivatable:related-action
-property and call gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() when it changes.</para></note>
-Since: 2.16
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkTargetList
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_default">
+<description>
+Determines whether @widget is the current default widget within its
+toplevel. See gtk_widget_set_can_default().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAction to set
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget is the current default widget within
+its toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
+
+Since: 2.18
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_blinking">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if the icon is blinking
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the icon is blinking
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_fill_level">
@@ -66786,16 +68083,29 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIMMulticontext.
+Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
+this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). Note the
+list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the
+widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update
+its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection
+to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal or a weak notifier.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that acts as a mnemonic label for @widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkIMMulticontext.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_test_create_simple_window">
@@ -67139,15 +68449,27 @@ wildcarded.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
<description>
-Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
-hidden (invisible to the user).
+Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
+the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
+See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment.
+
+The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
+as the entry.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
+is moved, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -67396,23 +68718,6 @@ Marks are not visible by default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_sensitive">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new_for_manager">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget with a specified recent manager.
@@ -67529,8 +68834,8 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Causes @widget to become the default widget. @widget must have the
%GTK_CAN_DEFAULT flag set; typically you have to set this flag
-yourself by calling <literal>GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (@widget,
-GTK_CAN_DEFAULT)</literal>. The default widget is activated when
+yourself by calling <literal>gtk_widget_set_can_default (@widget,
+%TRUE)</literal>. The default widget is activated when
the user presses Enter in a window. Default widgets must be
activatable, that is, gtk_widget_activate() should affect them.
@@ -67544,16 +68849,22 @@ activatable, that is, gtk_widget_activate() should affect them.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkMenuItem">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_copy">
<description>
-The minimum desired width of the menu item in characters.
+Copies a #GtkTreeRowReference.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeRowReference
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a copy of @reference.
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_statusbar_push">
@@ -67653,21 +68964,78 @@ to use as a base image when creating icon variants for #GtkIconSet.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_delete_selection">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source">
<description>
-Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
-This call doesn't do anything if there is no selected text.
+Turns @tree_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
+method sets #GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_button_mask">
+<parameter_description> Mask of allowed buttons to start drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> the table of targets that the drag will support
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the number of items in @targets
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this
+widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_im_context_get_surrounding">
+<description>
+Retrieves context around the insertion point. Input methods
+typically want context in order to constrain input text based on
+existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai where
+only some sequences of characters are allowed.
+
+This function is implemented by emitting the
+GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal on the input method; in
+response to this signal, a widget should provide as much context as
+is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling
+gtk_im_context_set_surrounding(). Note that there is no obligation
+for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve_surrounding signal, so input
+methods must be prepared to function without context.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> location to store a UTF-8 encoded string of text
+holding context around the insertion point.
+If the function returns %TRUE, then you must free
+the result stored in this location with g_free().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cursor_index">
+<parameter_description> location to store byte index of the insertion cursor
+within @text.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case
+you must free the result stored in *text.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_positions">
<description>
Moves up to @count cursor positions. See
@@ -67774,7 +69142,7 @@ Return value: The number of columns.
<function name="gtk_icon_info_new_for_pixbuf">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GtkPixbuf.
+Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GdkPixbuf.
</description>
@@ -67887,27 +69255,6 @@ any focus widget for the toplevel window.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_set_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
-
-See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_shell_get_take_focus">
<description>
Returns: %TRUE if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
@@ -67925,20 +69272,21 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_blinking">
+<function name="gtk_action_create_menu_item">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the icon is blinking
+Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icon is blinking
+<return> a menu item connected to the action.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -67958,28 +69306,4 @@ Get the adjustment associated with a #GtkSpinButton
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_set">
-<description>
-Gets the icon set and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
-The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> location to store a #GtkIconSet, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> location to store a stock icon size, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
</root>
diff --git a/gtk/src/printoperation.hg b/gtk/src/printoperation.hg
index 63ca535..c1d9189 100644
--- a/gtk/src/printoperation.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/printoperation.hg
@@ -147,6 +147,10 @@ public:
//TODO: This is causing crashes. Is it still causing crashes? murrayc.
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool preview(const Glib::RefPtr<PrintOperationPreview>& preview, const Glib::RefPtr<PrintContext>& context, Window* parent), "preview")
+ //TODO: Remove no_default_handler when we can break ABI.
+ #m4 _CONVERSION(`GtkPrintSettings*', `const Glib::RefPtr<PrintSettings>&', `Glib::wrap($3, true)')
+ _WRAP_SIGNAL(void update_custom_widget(Gtk::Widget* widget, const Glib::RefPtr<PageSetup>& setup, const Glib::RefPtr<PrintSettings>& settings), "update_custom_widget", no_default_handler)
+
_WRAP_PROPERTY("default_page_setup", Glib::RefPtr<PageSetup>)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("print_settings", Glib::RefPtr<PrintSettings>)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("job_name", Glib::ustring)
diff --git a/gtk/src/statusicon.hg b/gtk/src/statusicon.hg
index 4b51e09..b58930d 100644
--- a/gtk/src/statusicon.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/statusicon.hg
@@ -27,6 +27,7 @@ _PINCLUDE(glibmm/private/object_p.h)
#include <gdkmm/pixbuf.h>
#include <gdkmm/types.h>
#include <gtkmm/object.h>
+#include <gtkmm/tooltip.h>
namespace Gtk
@@ -162,6 +163,8 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(void set_tooltip_text(const Glib::ustring& text), gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_text)
_WRAP_METHOD(Glib::ustring get_tooltip_markup() const, gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_markup)
_WRAP_METHOD(void set_tooltip_markup(const Glib::ustring& markup), gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup)
+ _WRAP_METHOD(void set_title(const Glib::ustring& title), gtk_status_icon_set_title)
+ _WRAP_METHOD(Glib::ustring get_title() const, gtk_status_icon_get_title)
_WRAP_METHOD(guint32 get_x11_window_id() const, gtk_status_icon_get_x11_window_id)
@@ -175,6 +178,7 @@ public:
_WRAP_PROPERTY("screen", Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Screen>)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("blinking", bool)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("visible", bool)
+ _WRAP_PROPERTY("title", Glib::ustring)
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool size_changed(int size), size_changed)
@@ -184,6 +188,7 @@ public:
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool button_press_event(GdkEventButton* event), button_press_event, no_default_handler)
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool button_release_event(GdkEventButton* event), button_release_event, no_default_handler)
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool scroll_event(GdkEventScroll* event), scroll_event, no_default_handler)
+ _WRAP_SIGNAL(bool query_tooltip(int x, int y, bool keyboard_mode, const Glib::RefPtr<Tooltip>& tooltip), query_tooltip, no_default_handler)
};
} // namespace Gtk
[
Date Prev][
Date Next] [
Thread Prev][
Thread Next]
[
Thread Index]
[
Date Index]
[
Author Index]
